Author: Johannes Surya

  • What is Ausubel’s Theory: How to Apply Meaningful Learning

    David Ausubel is an educational psychologist who is popular with the theory of meaningful learning or what is often called Ausubel’s theory. Ausubel himself emphasizes the importance of meaningful learning and also the importance of repetition before the start of learning. According to Ausubel, learning can be categorized into two dimensions. The first dimension is related to the way information or material is presented to students through acceptance or discovery. Then the second dimension is related to how students can relate this information to existing cognitive structures, which include facts, concepts, and also generalizations that students have learned and remembered.

    According to Ausubel, in the first stage of learning, information can be communicated to students in the form of acceptance learning by presenting information in a final form or requiring students to find their own material to be taught. Then at the second level, students connect or relate this information to the knowledge they already have. In this case, there will be a meaningful learning process.

    This Ausubel theory is a theory that was first put forward by David Paul Ausubel, who is a child psychiatrist and also a well-known academic working in the fields of educational psychology, ego development, general psychology, drug addiction, and also forensic psychiatry. Throughout his career, both as a child psychiatrist and as a Professor at New York University, he has published numerous scientific papers and books that have contributed to and influenced the field of educational psychology that he is devoted to.

    Until now, various kinds of thoughts, results from research, and also ausubel theories are still very relevant to be taught, and also applied, especially in the field of educational psychology. Below are some explanations about Ausubel’s theory.

    Ausubel’s biography

    David Paul Ausubel was born and raised in Brooklyn, New York in 1918. This Ausubel was a University of Pennsylvania alumnus who graduated from Middlesex University Medical School and earned a Ph.D in developmental educational psychology at Columbia University. The process of his journey in the world of education began in the world of medicine when he was an apprentice at the New York City Department Hospital, Manhattan, as well as in Little Italy and Chinatown in 1944 as an assistant surgeon and also a general psychiatrist.

    Then in 1950, he got a position with the Bureau of Educational Research at the University of Illinois. Where he worked there for approximately 16 years and it was there that Ausubel began to publish various works in the field of cognitive psychology extensively. Then in 1966, he finally left the University of Illinois to accept a position in the department of Applied Psychology at the Ontario Institute, Toronto. After that, in 1968 to be precise, he became a Professor and also Head of the Department of Psychology Education, New York University Undergraduate School until he retired from education in 1973.

    After Ausubel retired, he returned to practice child psychiatry at Rockland Psychiatric. His main interests in psychiatry are general psychopathology, drug addiction, ego development, and also forensic psychiatry. Ausubel has published several books discussing developmental and educational psychology as well as more than 150 articles in psychology and psychiatric journals. Then in 1976, he received the Thorndike Award from the American Association of Psychologists for “Honorary Degree for Contributions to Educational Psychology”. Ausubel retired from professional life in 1994 with the intention of spending time as a writer and producing four books. In the end, Ausubel passed away on July 9, 2008.

    Ausubel Learning Theory

    Ausubel’s theory relates to how individuals learn a number of meaningful materials from textual or verbal, presentations, or settings as well as other actions in schools or other educational institutions. According to Ausubel, learning is based on the types of superordinate processes, representations, and also combinations that occur during the reception of information. A major process in this learning is subsumption, in which new material is related to relevant ideas in existing cognitive structures, based on nonverbal substantives.

    In addition, according to Ausubel, learning can be classified into two dimensions, including:

    1. The first dimension is the dimension related to the way in which information is conveyed or subject matter can be communicated to students in the form of acceptance or discovery learning.
    2. The second dimension concerns how students can relate this information to existing cognitive structures. The two dimensions, namely acceptance or discovery and memorization or meaning, will not show a simple dichotomy, but are a continuum process.

    Types of Learning According to Ausubel

    Based on the two-dimensional classification of learning that has been described above, we can understand that acceptance as well as discovery from the learning process is not simple and includes a different continuum process. Thus, the process of acceptance and discovery also has several different types. According to Ausubel, there are four types of learning, which include the following:

    1. Learning By Meaningful Discovery

    This type of learning will link the knowledge they already have with the subject matter being studied. Or conversely, students find knowledge first compared to what they will learn. Then the discovery will be linked to existing knowledge.

    2. Learning By Meaningless Inventions

    This type of learning is a lesson that students will learn and discover for themselves without associating what they already have, then they memorize it.

    3. Learn to Accept Meaning

    Namely the subject matter that has been arranged logically and then conveyed to the students until the final form. Then, the new knowledge they get will be linked to other knowledge they already have.

    4. Learn To Accept Meaninglessness

    That is, lesson materials that have been arranged logically are then conveyed to students until the final form. After that, the new knowledge they get is memorized without associating it with other knowledge they already have.

    Meaningful Learning Process (Meaningful Learning)

    Through various kinds of thoughts about finding and accepting meaningful and meaningless, then the concept of meaningful learning or a meaningful learning process is formed. It is said that this learning process will be much more meaningful and useful for students if they experience or go through a meaningful learning process. Ausubel said that what is meant by meaningful learning is learning that can link the previous learning material with the learning material that will be studied later.

    Ausubel’s theory is closely related to Constructivism learning theory. Both emphasize the importance of learning to associate new phenomena, experiences, and facts into the understanding systems that students already have and emphasize the importance of an assimilation of new experiences into concepts that students already have.

    Ausubel also believes that educators must also be able to develop students’ cognitive potential through meaningful learning processes. That means, being able to associate a phenomenon, experience, and also various kinds of facts in their environment. Thus, students will have an attitude of social behavior that is formed from an experience that they apply, not just mere memorization and formality.

    Ausubel Learning Principles

    Based on Ausubel’s view of meaningful learning, he proposes three principles of learning, which are as follows:

    1. Presentation of Advance Organizer

    Advance organizers will direct students to the material they will later learn and help them to recall relevant information and can be used to help impart new knowledge. The advance organizer is concerned with the ideas conveyed in a lesson to provide information to students who are ready in their minds and provides a broad organizational scheme in the form of more specific information.

    2. Presentation of Learning Tasks or Materials

    A lesson that uses new material should be delivered by giving lectures, discussing a film, or giving assignments to students. Ausubel also emphasizes the need to maintain students’ attention as well as the need to organize course material clearly to relate to the arrangement that has been planned in the advance organizer. He suggested a process called progressive differentiation, in which a step-by-step progress from general concepts to specific concepts.

    3. Strengthening Cognitive Organization

    In the third phase of the ausubel learning principle, teachers are advised to incorporate new information into the planned lesson plans for the initial lesson by reminding their students how each particular detail relates to the big picture. In addition, students were also asked to see whether they understood the lesson with their previous knowledge and connected it to the organizations in the advance organizer.

    Meaningful Learning Steps

    Here are some steps in implementing meaningful learning or meaningful learning, including:

    1. Define a learning objective.
    2. Identify student characteristics, starting from initial abilities, learning styles, motivation, and so on.
    3. Choose subject matter according to student characteristics and organize it into core concept forms.
    4. Determine the topics and display them in the form of advance organizers that will be studied by students.
    5. Study the core concepts and apply them in a real or concrete form.

    Meanwhile, according to Herliani, the steps that are generally taken to apply Ausubel’s meaningful learning or meaningful learning are:

    1. Advance Organizer or Handout

    This is an initial presentation of the material that will be studied by students which can be in the form of handouts or a brief introduction about what students will learn in general. Through this handout, we can prepare students mentally to receive the material, if they already know the material that will be presented in the lesson.

    2. Progressive Differential

    The subject matter delivered by the teacher should be taught in stages. Starting with general things or concepts, then proceed to specific things with examples.

    3. Integrative Reconciliation

    In this stage, the teacher will provide an explanation of the similarities and differences between the concepts they already know and the concepts they have just learned.

    4. Consolidation

    Strengthening the material in the form of presenting more examples or exercises. So that students will understand better and be more ready to accept new material.

    Those are some explanations about what Ausubel’s theory is and some ways to apply it. Hope it is useful.

  • What is Archeology? Definition, Development History, and Benefits

    What is Archeology? Definition, History of Development, and Its Benefits in the Scientific Field – Surely you have studied at school about how the times progressed from prehistoric times to modern times as it is today. In the lesson on history, it must also be closely related to various remains such as for example the discovery of ancient human fossils, inscriptions from royal relics in the past, or even various artifacts that can be found from various eras which are part of history.

    In every discovery of these historical objects we can also know based on research conducted by people who are experts in that field. The studies that succeeded in finding historical objects were carried out by a professional in his field or commonly called an archaeologist.

    An archaeologist is a job performed by someone who is interested in and directly involved with world history and discoveries that are usually buried in the ground. These findings are not always located in places that have potential historical value but can also be found in the yards of local residents’ houses in certain areas.

    An archaeologist is an expert in the field of archeology, namely the field of science that studies history and its development and takes part in the process of finding these historical objects. Archeology plays an important role as the main source of knowledge about ancient prehistoric cultures and may have been considered extinct. Archeology studies human life and culture in the past.

    Research on archeology is carried out by exploration and excavation or excavation. As a branch of science, archeology conducts research by searching, profiling, analyzing and interpreting data, whether in the form of artifacts, inscriptions and other objects of historical value.

    Definition of Archeology

    What is archeology? Archeology is the study of human culture from different eras by combining historical and geological sciences. Someone who studies this scientific study is referred to as a student majoring in archeology who in their studies will study material on the cultural history of various artifacts from time to time, such as inscriptions and paintings found in various locations.

    Apart from that, someone who studies in this field of knowledge will also learn how to dig up ancient artifacts, study historical facts behind artifacts, estimate the age of artifacts, the initial movements of the evolution of objects, humans and of course will also learn about museum organization.

    Archeology or a scientific field that studies ancient history is a science that studies past (human) cultures through a systematic study of documentary data. Systematic studies include discovery, documentation, analysis, cultural values, norms, customs, customary laws, and interpretation of data in the form of artifacts (material culture, such as axes, stones and temples) and ecofac (environmental objects, such as rocks, earth features, and the like). ). Fossils and their characteristics (artifacts cannot be separated from their location (archaeological site).

    A special research technique is archaeological excavation (excavation), even though investigative techniques are still archaeological in nature. . The goals of archeology are varied and subject to long debate, including what are known as archaeological models, constructing cultural history, understanding changes in the attitudes of living things, and understanding the processes of cultural change. Because it aims to understand the culture of living things including humans, this science belongs to the humanities group.

    However, various supporting sciences are used, including history, anthropology, geology (with the knowledge of the layers of the earth’s formation as a reference for the relative age of a discovery), archeology), geography, architecture, paleontology and biological anthropology, physics (including carbon c-14 for absolute dating), metallurgy (for obtaining elements of metal objects), and philology (study of ancient manuscripts).

    Archeology today covers a wide range of related fields. For example, the discovery of a buried corpse will arouse the interest of experts from various fields to study the clothing and the type of material used, the shape of the pottery and how it is used, the pattern of distribution, beliefs about what was buried with the body. corpses, chemists can determine the age of excavations through methods such as carbon-14 measurements. Meanwhile, geneticists who wanted to know the movements of the first human migrations, they examined their DNA.

    In particular, archeology studies past, ancient cultures, both in prehistoric (before writing was known) and historical periods (when written evidence is available). In its development, archeology can also study contemporary culture, as is usual in the study of modern material culture (modern material culture). Because it is based on objects from the past, archeology really needs to preserve these objects as a source of reference data. From there, another discipline developed, namely management of archaeological resources (Archaeological Resources Management), or more broadly, management of cultural resources (CRM, Culture Resources Management).

    In the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI), archeology is defined as the study of life and ancient culture through their remains, such as household utensils and statues. Archeology in English is called archeology or archeology. From the Encyclopedia Britannica (2015), archeology is the scientific study of the remains of material life and past human activities.

    Archeology plays an important role as a major source of knowledge of ancient and possibly extinct cultures. According to A. Nurkidam and Hasmiah Herawaty in their book Archeology as an Introduction (2019), etymologically the word archeology comes from the Greek archeo and logo. Archeo means ancient and logo means knowledge. Meanwhile, from a terminological point of view, archeology is defined as a science that studies the socio-cultural aspects of the past through the remains of found materials, with the aim of compiling and describing these ‘events’.

    Understanding Archeology According to Experts

    • Paul Bahn: Archeology is the systematic study of the past based on material culture with the aim of unraveling, interpreting and classifying cultural heritage, describing the forms and behavior of past peoples and studying human history.
    • Grahame Clark: Archeology as the systematic study of ancient documents to reshape history. It also explores how we became humans with souls and spirits before writing systems existed.
    • Brian Fagan: Archeology is the past science of ancient human behavior from time immemorial. It also puts all humans on the same footing.
    • Cottrell Leonard: Archeology as a human story concerns remains such as the tools used, monuments, human skeletons, and whatever is the result of their innovations.
    • Siegfried J. de Laet: Archeology as a discipline and a branch of history.
    • Nik Hassan Shuhaimi Nik Abd. Rahman: Originally a form of study of ancient documents through systematic descriptive methods around the 19th century and now as a discipline that aims to reshape cultural history, lifestyles and cultural processes of prehistoric, prehistoric and historical societies by studying artifacts and non-artifacts and looking at it in an environmental context.
    • Walter Taylor: Archeology is not history or anthropology. A distinct scientific discipline with a specific group of methods and techniques for gathering or gathering information about culture.

    History of Development

    Based on historical records, in the 6th century BC or around 556 BC to 539 BC, King Nabonidus and his daughter excavated the ruins of a communal house in the form of a temple in ancient times. The purpose of this excavation is to see the foundations of ancient buildings from the past. In the 5th century BC, Herodotus, a Greek scholar, collected ethnographic data and observations on the customs of the ancient Egyptians, Scythians, Greeks, and Persians. Herodotus is known as the father of anthropology and history. For centuries, ethnography has been the principal means of gathering research data on the past. Archeology was known during the Renaissance. At that time, many experts studied ancient ruins in Greece and Italy. Until 1800, archeology was not part of science. However, archeology continues to develop as a method of collecting ancient data. Final,

    • Age of antiquity (prehistory – 1820)

    Antiquity is a combination of the word “ancient” and the English ending “-ism”. According to the Dewan Language and Literature Dictionary, ancient means someone who studies, collects, and sells antiques while “-ism” means personality and behavior. It can be concluded that, “antiques” refers to the attitudes and behavior of those who research, collect, and trade antiques. The term most commonly used in English is archaic or archaic. The term first appeared in the 15th century as an offshoot of the history of Renaissance Humanism

    • Prehistoric Archeology (1820-1920)

    Prehistoric archeology flourished in Europe and the United States. The field of archeology today is more focused on depicting and recreating past life and looking at culture in a normative way. This is also reinforced by the existence of many theories that can be used in the field. In short, the story of today’s archaeological development is the construction and strengthening of research methods which are the results of theories collected from various scientific disciplines. This shows that archeology is a multidisciplinary field.

    From geology, the idea of ​​soil layers was derived by James Hutton while Charles Lyell’s theory of homogeneity was used to study the development of human archeology. This also proves that the view of the Bible at that time was not correct because for them human existence had existed since 4002 BC. But according to geological studies, the age of the earth is much older than the time suggested by the Bible. The three-age system proposed by Christian Jurgensen Thomsen facilitates the division of time according to artifacts, namely the Stone Age, Bronze Age and Iron Age.

    • Ancient Archaeological Age (1920-1960)

    Ancient archeology, also known as traditional archeology, is a period of great change from a theoretical and methodological point of view. Excavations were also carried out and important discoveries were discovered and recorded, such as the discovery of Tutankhamun’s tomb, Ur burial at Chalaea and a prehistoric cave at Lascaux. Surveying techniques such as photographic applications were developed by OGS Crawford whereas in terms of excavation techniques they are deeper and better than ever in excavating, documenting, illustrating and interpreting Mortimer Wheeler, common in excavation sites in southern England and northern France between 193 and 1937 .

    • New Age Archeology (1960–2000)

    New Archeology was introduced by Lewis Binford, an American archaeologist, and British David Clarke in the mid-1960s.

    • Developments in Indonesia

    Indonesian archaeologists are members of the Association of Indonesian Archaeologists or IAAI. Notable Indonesian archaeological figures include R. Soekmono, who directed the restoration of Borobudur Temple, and RP Soejono, founder and president of the first Indonesian Association of Archaeologists and former director of the National Center for Archaeological Research.

    Archeology in Indonesia is still characterized by chronological divisions, namely prehistoric, classical period (Hindu-Buddhist period), Islamic period and colonial period. So, in Indonesian archeology there are chronological specialties, namely prehistoric archeology, classical archeology, Islamic archeology, and colonial archeology. One feature of Indonesian archeology is the inclusion of the discipline of symbolism, which focuses on reading ancient inscriptions. Today, developments have given rise to special interests such as ethnographic archeology, underwater archeology and archeology. There are also sub-disciplines that develop as a result of contact with other sciences, such as environmental archeology or ecological archeology, economic archeology, art archeology, archeology and archeology, demography and architectural archeology.

    The Benefits of Archeology in the Scientific Field

    Archeology is a science that is useful in providing insight to people about life in the past. This knowledge is also useful in providing knowledge about human civilization. Archeology helps humans gain knowledge and understand the origins and events that have occurred. Archaeological research can also get a number of benefits, including;

    • Exploring Historical Objects

    Of course, to study archeology, one would know the remains of historical times. The reason is, in archeology, people are familiar with studying historical artifacts to find out the process of cultural change from the past to the present.

    • Increase historical scientific research

    Archaeological research also helps to further elevate a person by increasing the study of history that happened in his past. Because in archeology, new knowledge is obtained and can be used by archaeologists in carrying out their duties.

    • Knowing more about human culture

    Archeology also allows people to get to know human culture better, especially in the past. Because in this archeology, an archaeologist or someone who is an expert in their field will see and analyze human culture from the beginning, from the pre-literacy process to the post-literacy process.

    • Increase knowledge base

    The next benefit of archeology is that it can add to the knowledge base. Indirectly it can be ascertained that by studying archeology, one can gain new knowledge and know more historical sources. This is because in archeology itself what is most often studied is culture in historical times from the remains of its monuments.

    • Able to categorize every culture that exists in human life.

    By studying archeology, one can also classify every culture that exists in human life. This means that one can see how and when people in historical time have experienced cultural changes over time.

    • Tracing the Early History of Human Life From the Past to the Present

    Finally, the benefit of studying archeology is that it can reveal the early history of human life in the past to the earliest times. Cultural changes occur in the present. This of course must be adjusted to the historical chronological meaning of what happened.

    Goals of Archeology

    In the journal Center for Research and Research on Archeology of West Kalimantan (2013) by Benson Manalu, archeology in general aims to collect accurate data about past life. If described, the science of archeology has three main objectives, namely:

    • To present the cultural history of society in the past.
    • Show how people lived in the past.
    • Symbolizes the process of cultural change in the past.

    Research Stage in Archeology

    Stages of Archaeological Research According to the Archaeological Museum of Ontario, archaeological research is divided into four main stages, namely:

    • Data collection

    At this stage, archaeologists will try to get an idea of ​​the potential data in the area of ​​the archaeological site. This step is also done by studying maps and historical documents related to the place. Data collection also includes the process of surveying or observing the area of ​​ancient sites. In addition to surveys, data collection is also often carried out by systematic excavation or excavation methods.

    • Data processing

    After the initial stage, the data collected is usually in the form of artifacts (ancient historical objects), ecological artifacts (objects that are part of human life that do not change) and/or features (archaeological objects that cannot be separated) from the site. archeology). In the second step, the data must be classified into predefined groups. Examples are numbered and listed by category. This classification is intended to facilitate the data analysis process in the next step.

    • Data analysis

    After the data is processed, the next step is to analyze it. The analysis step is carried out by looking for relationships or relationships between the resulting data. This relationship can be seen from the production technique, size, color, decoration, usage or others. The process of data analysis takes a long time because many data results may be damaged. The process also requires extraordinary patience and precision in observing every detail.

    • Data Disclosure

    The final step is to report and publish the data. Reporting is intended as a form of accountability on the part of the clergy. At the same time, the data release is intended to inform the public about the results and analysis. Data publication can be done through the publication of books and/or journals. In addition, this can also be done by organizing photography and video publication exhibitions.

     

     

    Conclusion

    Thus a brief discussion of the definition of archeology. The discussion this time does not only discuss the definition of archeology but also discusses the definition of several experts regarding archeology, the history of archaeological development, the benefits of archeology in everyday life and the stages in archaeological research. Understanding the notion of archeology allows us to add new insights into the world’s historical setting and developments that we as laypeople rarely know.

    And make us to take part because we are also part of ongoing history. That’s a review of the notion of archeology. For Sinaumed’s who want to learn all about the notion of archeology and other historical related knowledge, you can visit sinaumedia.com to get related books. As #FriendsWithoutLimits, sinaumedia always provides the best products, so you have the best and latest information for you. To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

    Author: Pandu Akram

  • What is Anxiety? Feelings of Fear that Don’t Know the Cause

    Anxiety that arises within is a natural thing to happen, because anxiety or feeling worried is a form of emotional outburst when you are feeling stressed or depressed. This situation often occurs in several ways, for example when you are about to face an exam or job interview or have to make an important decision that involves many people.

    Even so, you still need to pay attention to the anxiety that you experience. The reason is, the feeling of worry that cannot be controlled and ends in fear without cause is not something that is natural. It could be, you are suffering from an anxiety disorder called anxiety.

    So, what is meant by anxiety? In order to find out about discussions related to anxiety, you need to pay attention to the complete discussion about anxiety. Starting from the understanding of anxiety, the characteristics of anxiety, to the types of anxiety. Curious what it is? Let’s find out together.

    A. The definition of anxiety is

    Anxiety is a feeling of discomfort and fear for no reason or a fear that is not clear when the situation is not supported. Anxiety is also known as anxiety disorder or anxiety disorder.

    Of course, everyone has experienced anxiety in their life. For example, before appearing in public or before making a presentation or interview. If the anxiety is justified, then it is a natural thing. However, if anxiety is often experienced for no apparent reason, it could be a sign of an anxiety disorder.

    B. Characteristics of Anxiety

    Anxiety has several characteristics that you need to recognize, including the following:

    1. Hands or other members are shaking

    2. It’s hard to talk

    3. Breath fast or short

    4. The heart becomes pounding

    5. Fingertips become cold

    6. Choking sensation

    7. Stomach ache

    In addition, anxiety patients may also experience behavioral and cognitive changes. Examples of cognitive behavioral disorders are avoidance and dependence on people. Meanwhile, cognitive changes that occur such as having the belief that something bad will happen, being sensitive to body sensitivity, difficulty concentrating, and other disturbances.

    C. Causes of anxiety

    Reporting from the National Health Service, states that the cause of anxiety has not been found with certainty. However, there are a number of factors that have been proven to cause anxiety disorders or anxiety, including the following:

    1. Excessive activity on the brain

    2. The hormones serotonin and noradrenaline in the brain are not balanced

    3. Have a family history

    4. Having a traumatic experience

    5. Have a painful chronic disease, such as arthritis

    D. Symptoms and Signs of Anxiety

    Actually, the symptoms and signs of anxiety depend on the type of anxiety disorder the sufferer is experiencing. Are as follows:

     

     

    1. General Anxiety Disorder (GAD)

    A number of symptoms and signs that appear, if you have this type of anxiety disorder, include:

    a. Easily tired

    b. Constantly restless

    c. Difficulty concentrating

    d. Empty minded

    e. Easy to get angry

    f. Easily offended

    g. Muscle cramp

    h. Difficulty controlling feelings of worry

    i. Experiencing sleep disturbances, including feeling sleep deprived

    2. Panic Disorder

    The following are a number of symptoms and signs of a person experiencing panic disorder, including:

    a. Feeling uneasy

    b. Constant panic for no apparent reason

    c. Heart palpitations or increased heart rate

    d. Shortness of breath or hunting

    e. Sweating and shaking

    f. Hands and feet feel cramps, tingling to the point of numbness

    g. Difficulty controlling fear or anxiety

    h. Strained muscles

    3. Social Phobia

    Here are some of the symptoms and signs of social phobia, including:

    a. Excessive nervousness during social interactions

    b. Experiencing intense anxiety for days, weeks, and even months.

    c. An intense fear of how others will judge your feelings, especially people you don’t know.

    d. Avoid face-to-face encounters with opponents.

    e. Choose silence or hide to avoid people.

    f. Withdrawing from social activities.

    g. Face becomes red when asked to speak in front of many people.

    h. Short or rushed breaths

    i. Stomach ache

    j. Nauseous

    k. Trembling at heart

    l. The chest becomes congested

    m. Sweating

    n. Feeling dizzy or dizzy

    4. Specific Phobia

    As the name suggests, someone who has a specific phobia will have a very great fear of certain objects, objects or situations. Someone with this condition might scream or cry hysterically when the things they are afraid of are in front of them. A number of physical and emotional symptoms that may be experienced by people with specific phobias, include the following:

    a. The heartbeat and breathing become irregular when they see something that is feared.

    b. Excessive fear to the point of sweating profusely.

    c. Sudden nausea

    d. Feeling angry when in a place or situation where there are things that are feared.

    e. Strongly avoids everything related to things that are feared.

    f. Someone who is in this condition will suddenly become limp. When the perceived fear has reached its peak.

    There may be other symptoms and signs of anxiety disorders that are not described above. If you have concerns about these signs and symptoms, then you can consult a doctor.

    E. Types of Anxiety

    Once you know about anxiety. Following are some explanations regarding the types of anxiety, including:

     

     

    1. Generalized Anxiety Disorder

    Someone with generalized anxiety disorder can feel excessively anxious and worried about everything from work to health to other simple things, such as interacting with other people. Anxiety that arises due to generalized anxiety disorder can be felt every day and persists for more than 6 (six) months.

    As a result, sufferers will find it difficult to carry out daily activities and work. In addition to the emergence of disturbing feelings of anxiety, sufferers of generalized anxiety disorder can also feel tired, tense, nauseous, headaches, difficulty concentrating, shortness of breath, and insomnia.

    2. Phobias

    Phobia is a type of anxiety disorder that causes sufferers to have excessive fear and tend to be irrational towards certain objects, animals or situations that do not cause fear in many people. Someone who has a phobia can experience panic attacks or intense fear when they see an object or are in a place that can trigger a phobia.

    For example, spiders, blood, being in a crowd, high places, dark places, or closed rooms. Therefore, people with phobias will generally do everything they can to avoid things or situations that are scary.

    3. Social Anxiety Disorder

    People with social anxiety disorder or also called social phobia have extraordinary anxiety or fear of the social environment or situations where they have to interact with other people. People with this disorder will always feel watched and valued by others. As well as fear and excessive embarrassment when in a crowd. These things make sufferers always try to avoid situations that require them to meet or interact with many people.

    4. Post Traumatic Stress Disorder (PTSD)

    Post-traumatic stress disorder or Post Traumatic Stress Disorder can occur in someone who has experienced a traumatic event or is in a dangerous, life-threatening situation. For example, living in conflict or war areas, affected by natural disasters, or even victims of violence.

    It is often difficult for someone with Post Traumatic Stress Disorder to forget the experience of trauma. Whether it crosses your mind or when you dream, then you feel guilty, isolated, and find it difficult to socialize with other people. Sometimes someone who has a disorder like that can also experience insomnia to depression.

    5. Panic Disorder

    Anxiety and panic attacks cause this disorder to appear at any time and occur suddenly and repeatedly. When these panic symptoms appear, sufferers of panic disorder can generally feel several other symptoms. For example palpitations, dizziness, cold sweats, and the body feels weak and shaking.

    A person with panic disorder cannot predict when this disorder will appear or what triggers it. Therefore, not a few of those with panic disorder avoid themselves from the social environment for fear of an attack, so panic can appear in public places.

    6. Obsessive Compulsive Disorder (OCD)

    Someone who has Obsessive Compulsive Disorder (OCD) has a tendency to do everything repeatedly to relieve anxiety that arises in their own minds. For example, washing hands which must be done 3 times a day because he thinks his hands still feel dirty. This disorder is difficult to control and is sedentary. And can make a relapse at any time. So that it interferes with the patient’s daily activities.

    F. How to Overcome Anxiety

    There are 2 (two) ways you can deal with anxiety, including the following:

    1. Psychotherapy

    Psychotherapy or also known as speech therapy or psychological counseling is one way you can do to overcome anxiety. There are various types of psychotherapy, but the one most often used to treat anxiety is cognitive behavioral therapy.

    This therapy focuses on the relationship between problems, behaviors, and thought patterns. In this therapy, you will be asked to open up by telling the therapist about all the complaints you are facing.

    There’s no need to feel embarrassed or worried, because the therapist will treat you in a non-judgmental way and of course keep all your secrets. Guided by this therapist, you will be invited to find the root of the problem you want to solve and the final goal you want to achieve.

    2. Drugs

    The doctor will prescribe a certain number of drugs to relieve the symptoms of anxiety that you are experiencing. Here are a number of drugs that doctors often prescribe to treat anxiety, including:

    a. Antidepressant drugs, for example paroxetine, sertraline, fluoxetine, escitalopram, and citalopram.

    b. Anti-anxiety drugs, for example alprazolam or xanax, benzodiazepines, chlordiazepoxide or librium, clonazepam or klonopine, lorazepam, and diazepam or valium.

    In addition, the doctor will prescribe other drugs according to the condition of the anxiety sufferer. So please consult a doctor for more information.

    G. Anxiety Risk Factors

    Actually, the risk factors for each type of anxiety are very diverse. Likewise with the risk factors for anxiety which are also quite varied. The following are a number of common risk factors that can cause all types of anxiety, including:

     

     

    1. Trauma

    A child who has experienced sexual abuse or witnessed a traumatic event in the past is at increased risk of developing anxiety as an adult. Not only children, adults too.

    2. Genetic History

    Having blood relatives, especially parents and siblings can also increase the risk of developing anxiety disorders or anxiety.

    3. Certain Personalities

    Someone with a certain personality type will also be more susceptible to anxiety disorders than others.

    4. Mental Disorders

    Someone with a mental disorder, for example depression will also be at risk of experiencing anxiety.

    5. Users of Drugs and Alcohol

    The use of alcohol and illegal drugs can cause or even exacerbate anxiety disorders or anxiety experienced by a person.

    6. Stress Due to Illness

    Having a serious health condition or illness can also trigger feelings of excessive fear and anxiety. Especially regarding medical expenses, chances of recovery, and how to deal with it in the future. Apart from being sick, you can also experience anxiety due to the loss of loved ones, economic pressure, and even losing your job.

     

  • What Is Adrenaline? Know the Benefits and Dangers to the Body

    What Is Adrenaline? Know the Benefits and Dangers to the Body

    Adrenaline is- Have you ever been in a tense situation? Like being on an extreme ride on a playground, watching a horror movie, or almost facing death while driving a vehicle. When you are in that situation, usually a person will feel adrenaline in their body which is triggered by the stressful things mentioned above.

    The human body generally produces the hormone adrenaline which is used as a response for the human body when experiencing a stressful situation or when under stress to react quickly. However, it should be noted that the hormone adrenaline must also be controlled in normal amounts because it has an impact on the body if it is excess or lacking.

    For this reason, Sinaumed’s friends who have experienced being in a stressful situation need to know that the body’s quick response is present because of the adrenaline hormone in the body. So, in this discussion, we will also listen to interesting facts about the adrenaline hormone.

    Furthermore, the discussion about adrenaline can be listened to below!

    What Is Adrenaline?

    Adrenaline (English: adrenaline, epinephrine) is a drug and hormone involved in the regulation of visceral functions (eg breathing). Adrenaline is produced by the adrenal glands and a small number of nerve cells in the spinal cord. Adrenaline plays an important role in the fight-or-flight response by increasing muscle blood flow, cardiac output by acting on the SA node, the pupil dilation response, and blood sugar.

    Adrenaline performs this action by binding to adrenergic receptors: alpha and beta. Adrenaline is present in many animals and some unicellular organisms. Polish physiologist Napoleon Cybulski first isolated adrenaline in 1895.

    Adrenaline is a hormone produced by the body when faced with a dangerous or stressful situation. In a balanced amount, this hormone has an important role in maintaining the function of various organs in the body. However, a deficiency or excess of the adrenaline hormone can actually be dangerous to health.

    The hormone adrenaline, or sometimes also called epinephrine, is a hormone produced by the adrenal glands and the brain. The body releases this hormone when it feels stressed, depressed, scared, excited, or in a stressful and dangerous situation.

    “Adrenaline overload can result from prolonged stress, and this effect can increase a number of health risks. While adrenaline deficiency is rare, it can leave a person unable to react. Therefore, we must be able to manage stress well.”

    Adrenaline will bring about a number of changes to the body, including a faster heart rate and more efficient lung breathing. This causes blood vessels to send more blood to the brain and muscles, increases blood pressure, makes the brain more alert, and raises blood sugar to give you energy. The pupils will also dilate and you will sweat during the experience.

    When there’s more adrenaline in your blood, you don’t feel as much pain, so you can keep running or fighting, even if you get hurt. It makes you stronger and allows you to perform better.

    The body also makes a similar chemical called norepinephrine (or norepinephrine). It is made in the nervous system and released into the bloodstream continuously. Unlike adrenaline, which affects many parts of the body, noradrenaline’s main role is to control blood pressure.

    Adrenaline benefits

    As previously explained, the function of the adrenaline hormone is to trigger the body’s fight-or-flight response. This response causes the airways to widen to deliver the oxygen needed to the muscles to fight danger or escape.

    Vascular hormone explains that the hormone adrenaline also triggers the constriction of blood vessels to direct blood to major muscle groups, including the heart and lungs. The body’s ability to feel pain is also reduced by adrenaline, which is why one can continue to run away or fight danger even when injured.

    The hormone adrenaline causes a marked increase in strength and performance, as well as increased alertness, during times of stress. After the stress subsides, the effects of the adrenaline hormone can last up to an hour.

    When it enters the bloodstream, the hormone adrenaline will have an impact on various organs of the body such as:

    • The heart beats faster and works harder so alertness increases
    • Blood vessels dilate, increasing blood flow to the muscles and brain
    • Sweat production increases
    • The senses of sight and hearing become sharper
    • Blood sugar rises, which the body uses for energy
    • Breathing becomes faster
    • Pain is not felt

    This adrenaline hormone will be produced naturally by the body when the body is in a dangerous situation or experiencing severe stress. This response is a form of the body’s defense to deal with circumstances.

    Besides being produced naturally by the body, adrenaline can also be produced as a medicine. This artificial or synthetic adrenaline hormone is commonly used for:

    • Treatment of severe allergies or anaphylaxis, severe asthma attacks and heart attacks
    • Treating shock, for example due to bleeding, severe dehydration, or severe infection (sepsis)
    • Prolongs the duration of anesthetic effect in surgery.
    • Support cardiopulmonary resuscitation

    Impact of Excess Adrenaline on the Body

    Excess adrenaline hormone is common. This can be caused by prolonged stress which causes a person to have too much adrenaline.

    In addition, some rare medical conditions, such as tumors on the adrenal glands, can also cause a person to have too much adrenaline.

    This condition can cause you to experience several health symptoms or problems, such as:

    • High blood pressure
    • Headache or dizziness
    • Vision becomes blurred
    • Restless and irritable
    • Trouble sleeping or insomnia
    • sweating too much
    • Fast heart rate

    Over time, high levels of the hormone adrenaline can increase your risk of heart attack or stroke and lead to palpitations, high blood pressure, anxiety and weight loss.

    Impact of Adrenaline Deficiency for the Body

    Adrenaline deficiency is rare, even if you lose both adrenal glands due to illness or surgery. This is because 90% of the body’s norepinephrine comes from the nervous system. However, if your adrenaline is low, you may not respond well to stressful situations.

    Given that excess and deficiency of the hormone adrenaline has a negative effect, try to keep your hormone levels under control. When you’re stressed, you can lower adrenaline levels in your body by breathing slowly, meditating, practicing yoga, or tai chi which is beneficial for breathing. Excessive hormone levels can also be overcome by living a healthy lifestyle, such as consuming nutritious food, exercising regularly, and limiting caffeine and alcohol intake.

    The hormone adrenaline is not only dangerous when there is too much of it, but also dangerous when there is too little of it. Lack of adrenaline makes the body unable to react properly in stressful situations.

    In addition, low levels of the hormone adrenaline in the body will also cause:

    • Depression
    • sleep disorder
    • fibromyalgia
    • Easily tired
    • migraine headaches
    • restless leg syndrome
    • hypoglycemia

    There are several things you can do to keep your adrenaline levels in balance, including eating a healthy diet, exercising regularly, relaxing with meditation or yoga, and limiting your alcohol and caffeine intake. .

    If you are constantly experiencing stress or have certain diseases that can affect the production of the hormone adrenaline, such as an adrenal tumor, you should consult your doctor immediately.

    How does adrenaline work?

    Adrenaline starts in the brain. When you perceive a dangerous or stressful situation, that information is sent to a part of the brain called the amygdala. This area of ​​the brain is involved in processing emotions. If the amygdala detects danger, it sends signals to another area of ​​the brain called the hypothalamus. The hypothalamus itself is the command center of the brain. This part communicates with the rest of the body through the sympathetic nervous system.

    The hypothalamus sends signals via the autonomic nerves to the adrenal medulla. When the adrenal glands receive a signal, they respond by releasing adrenaline into the bloodstream.

    Once in the bloodstream, adrenaline will work in the following way:

    • Binds to receptors in liver cells to break down larger sugar molecules called glycogen into smaller, more usable sugars called glucose; it gives your muscles a boost of energy
    • Binds to muscle cell receptors in the lungs, making you breathe faster
    • Stimulates heart cells to beat faster
    • causes blood vessels to constrict and directs blood to major muscle groups
    • muscle cells contract beneath the surface of the skin to stimulate sweating
    • Binds to pancreatic receptors to inhibit insulin production

    The bodily changes that occur when adrenaline circulates in the blood are often called adrenaline because these changes occur quickly. In fact, it happened so quickly that you couldn’t fully process what was happening. It’s the adrenaline rush that gives you the ability to dodge oncoming cars before you even have a chance to think about it.

    Adrenaline Activating Activities

    When a person perceives a threat or danger, the hypothalamus or part of the limbic system at the base of the brain activates the sympathetic nervous system, also known as the fight or flight state.

    The brain instructs the adrenal glands to produce adrenaline, which is then released into the bloodstream. In addition to real threats and dangerous situations, people with certain mental health conditions can also experience increased adrenaline as part of their condition.

    People with post-traumatic stress disorder (PTSD) may also experience increased adrenaline from memories or thoughts about the trauma. People with panic disorders, such as agoraphobia or social anxiety disorder, may experience an adrenaline rush when faced with a situation they fear or another specific phobia. Some people love the feeling of adrenaline being released and enjoy the beating heart, dilated pupils, and sweating with excitement.

    Even though the purpose of adrenaline is to trigger the body’s quick response to stressful situations, sometimes some people do certain activities just to get the adrenaline pumping. Activities that can trigger adrenaline include:

    • Watch horror movies
    • Play Parachute
    • Jump off the cliff
    • Bungee jump
    • Diving with sharks
    • Playing bicycle on mountain track
    • Play rafting
    • Talk to your loved ones

    Adrenaline symptoms

    Adrenaline is a term sometimes described as an energy booster. Other symptoms of adrenaline rush are:

    • Increase heart rate
    • Sweat
    • Keen senses
    • Rapid breathing
    • Reduced ability to feel pain
    • Increased power and performance
    • The pupils are dilated
    • Feeling agitated or anxious
    • When the stress or danger wears off, the adrenaline effects can last up to an hour.

    How to Control Adrenaline

    It’s important to learn techniques to combat your body’s stress response. Experiencing stress is normal and sometimes good for your health.

    But over time, the constant rush of adrenaline can damage blood vessels, increase blood pressure and increase the risk of heart attack or stroke. It can also cause anxiety, weight gain, headaches, and insomnia.

    To help control adrenaline, you need to activate the parasympathetic nervous system, which is also known as the “rest and digestive system.” The resting and digesting response is the opposite of the fight-or-flight response. This helps promote balance in the body and allows your body to rest and repair itself.

    How to control adrenaline is:

    • Get to know the meaning of mental training and its types
    • Deep breathing exercises
    • Meditation
    • Yoga or tai chi exercises that combine movement and deep breathing
    • Talking to friends or family about stressful situations that you don’t think about at night; similarly, you can journal about your Feelings or thoughts
    • Have a healthy and balanced diet
    • Exercise regularly
    • Limit caffeine intake
    • Avoid cell phones, bright lights, computers, loud music, and television before bed

    Treatment and Treatment of Adrenaline Hormone Problems

    The main treatment for adrenaline or adrenal hormone disorders is to address the underlying cause.

    If the cause of your adrenaline problems is due to a biological disorder, your doctor may need time to test and find the necessary medication or other treatment. Most problems with the adrenaline hormone stem from stress.

    Adrenaline and other stress hormones are great for people when situations force them to fight or flee. However, it is important to learn how to neutralize the hormone adrenaline, so that the heart rate and blood pressure return to normal, the digestive and reproductive systems function or function regularly, and a person can feel good, ready and focused.

    While shutting off the stress response is not always easy, especially when life circumstances are difficult or when a person has been used to feeling stressed for long periods of time, there are several very effective treatments to help a person return to a relaxed state.

    Those are some explanations related to the hormone adrenaline. In the short term, the hormone adrenaline does not have a significant impact on health. But over time, high levels of the hormone adrenaline in a person’s body can cause real health problems. If a person is constantly feeling stressed, alert, anxious or panicked, it is best to make an appointment with a doctor. After all, the hormone adrenaline can increase heart rate, blood flow, and alertness.

    Conclusion

    That’s all the discussion about adrenaline which has benefits as well as dangers in the body. Not only discussing adrenaline, but also discussing the benefits of adrenaline in the body, the effects of excess and deficiency of adrenaline, knowing how adrenaline works in the body, symptoms of adrenaline, adrenaline trigger factors, and how to treat an excessive adrenaline reaction.

    Knowing about the hormone adrenaline gives more knowledge about every body reaction that we usually experience but we don’t know the trigger factors. Knowing about the adrenaline hormone allows us to know more about how the body reacts and not easily panic if the body’s reaction due to adrenaline is working.

  • What Is Acting? Understand the History and Essential Elements of Acting

    Acting, playing, or acting is the activity of telling a story through the actions of an actor who imitates the actions of a character. Acting may be performed in theatre, television, film, radio, or any other medium that uses mimetic modes. Most of the research from ancient sources on Western culture (Greek: ὑπόκρισις, hypocrisis ) considers acting as part of rhetoric.

    Acting involves a wide range of skills in terms of developing imagination, emotional control, physical expressiveness, vocal projection, speech prowess, and the ability to interpret drama. Acting also requires the ability to use dialect, accent, improvisation, observation. In addition, it requires emulation, pantomime and stage combat.

    Most novice actors develop their skills by attending specialist programs or colleges, while most professional actors receive regular and ongoing training. Instructors and teachers are provided to the cast for various trainings. Training activities include singing activities, work scenes, audition techniques, and acting in front of the camera.

    Acting History

    One of the first actors known to have been an ancient Greek was an Athens resident named Thespis. He is from Ikaria. Aristotle writes in his Poetics (ca. 335 BCE) that Thespis chose to stop working from the dithyrambic chorus .

    The name Thespis is derived from the word “thespian”. He called Thepsis a separate character. Before Thespis, he was a choir actor by mentioning a character named Dionysus. After he left, he replaced the name Dionysus with his own designation.

    Two centuries after that event, Aristotle then distinguished these two types of storytelling with action and narrative and used the terms “mimesis” for storytelling with action and “diegesis” for storytelling with narrative.

    Actor Training

    Member of First Studio when Konstantin Stanislavski began developing his actor training program. This program forms the basis for most of the professional training in the Western world.

    Conservatory and drama school training usually lasts anywhere from two to four years just to learn all aspects of acting. Meanwhile, most universities offer training programs of three to four years.

    Within universities, students may choose to focus on acting while studying other aspects of theatre. Each school uses a different approach to teaching acting. The most popular method in North America is the Konstantin Stanislavski program. This program was developed and popularized in America as a method used by Lee Strasberg, Stella Adler, and Sanford Meisner.

    Another approach is a physical-based orientation. This approach was promoted by theater practitioners, including Anne Bogart, Jacques Lecoq, Jerzy Grotowski and Vsevolod Meyerhold. Acting classes also include psychotechnics, mask work, physical theatre, improv, and acting on camera.

    In addition to the school approach, trainees must attend intensive training. This approach uses textual interpretation, sound and movement. Extensive auditions are generally used to select drama and conservatory programs to be awarded.

    Registrants come from participants who are over 18 years old. Some types of training can also be started at a younger age. Professional classes and schools with participants under the age of 18 are common. Young actors are introduced by coaches to various aspects of acting and theatre. One of these aspects is scene study.

    Physiologically calm and relaxed training takes place with increased speech training and exposure. Changes in stress are measured by counting the number of heartbeats of public speakers. Anxiety is measured when the heart rate increases. Performance-enhanced actors had lower heart rates and evidence of stress.

    Speech is an important exercise for actors, because it includes adaptation actions that can regulate anxiety from within and from outside oneself. Action physiology will increase by attending an institution with a specialization in acting. The body becomes more relaxed and stress can be reduced. The effects are hormonally healthy to cognitive health. These effects can affect quality of life and performance.

     

    Elements in Acting

    1. Improvisation in Acting

    Two masked characters from the commedia dell’arte , which involve a degree of improvisation.

    Several forms of classical acting make use of a substantial element. Acting is done with improvisation from the cast. An example of improvisation is in the commedia dell’arte troupe. This group is a form of masked comedy which is often performed in Italy.

    Russian theater practitioner Konstantin Stanislavski made improvisation his primary approach to acting. He developed a system of actor training in the 1910s. Late in 1910, Stanislavski was invited to Capri to discuss with playwright Maxim Gorky. The two discuss training and grammar in acting.

    Gorky was inspired by the popular theatrical performances in Naples which made use of the commedia dell’arte technique. He suggested that Stanislavski form a company with him. In addition, he suggested that this company emulate medieval walking players. In this drama model, a new play is co-designed by a scriptwriter and a group of young actors through improvisation.

    Stanislavski agreed and expanded on this use of improvisation in his work with his first studio at the Moscow Art Theatre. Stanislavski’s students developed his system of approach acting. Two of Stanislavski’s students were Michael Chekhov and Maria Knebel.

    The use of improvisation was pioneered in England in the 1930’s by Joan Littlewood. The use of improvised techniques was then continued by Keith Johnstone and Clive Barker. Meanwhile in the United States, Viola Spolin became the first person to promote improvisation. He began his promotion after starting work with Neva Boyd at the Hull House in Chicago, Illinois.

    Spolin was Boyd’s student from 1924 to 1927. Like British practitioners, Spolin believed play to be a useful tool in the training and improvement of actor performance. He believes that improvisation can make a person discover freedom of expression. The reason is that improvisation changes with certain conditions.

    Improvisation requires an open mind so that spontaneity can be maintained. This is different from planning a response in advance. Actors create a character without referring to the dramatic text so that a drama can be developed from spontaneous interactions with other actors. This approach has been substantially developed by British filmmaker Mike Leigh. He did this in films such as Secrets & Lies (1996), Vera Drake (2004), Another Year (2010), and Mr. Turners (2014).

    2. Physiological Effects in Acting

    Stress can arise when actors are talking or acting in front of an audience. This stress causes an increase in heart rate. However, an actor’s mistakes can also be covered by improvising.

    In 2017, a study was conducted of college students in the United States studying acting. The cast displayed the same elevated heart rates throughout their performances despite varying experience levels. This is in accordance with the results of previous studies that increased heart rate, both in professional actors and amateur actors.

    Stress is experienced by all types of actors, but there are differences in the varying number of heartbeats. More experienced actors have heart rates that change over a small range of values. While amateur actors have varying heart rates with a larger range. The stress experienced by more experienced actors is less than that of amateur actors. Heart rate stability is thus determined by the experience level of a cast.

    3. Semiotics in Acting

    Antonin Artaud compares the effect an actor’s performance has on the audience in the Theater of Cruelty . The comparison is done by means of a snake dance that can affect snakes.

    Acting uses the science of semiotics to know about ways to start a performance by using the audience as a sign. Semiotics mostly involves the formation of meanings that affect the performance of actors in a wider context. Dramatic action in the real world can shape the relationship between each actor.

     

    Difference between Stage and Film Acting

    Acting can be done on television, theater or stage and film. Acting performed in the theater or stage is known as stage acting, while acting in front of a camera is usually called film acting. Well, there is a difference between stage and film acting, you know!

    Stage acting is the motion, dialogue, and facial expressions shown by an actor or actress on the stage. Film acting is the movement and dialogue of the actors that will be recorded using a camera in a set. The sets are built by several divisions. These divisions include artistic, lighting, sound, image, make-up, costume, and so on. Both types of acting have their own criteria and ways of practicing. Here are five differences between stage and film acting that you should know about!

    1. Vocals

    Vocals are one of the most obvious differences. In doing stage acting, actors and actresses must have vocals that are loud and clear. Why? Because in stage acting, an actor and actress must be able to reach the audience’s hearing from the front row to the back row.

    In addition to loud and clear vocals, an actor and actress who performs stage acting is required to have proper articulation and intonation. In contrast to film acting, actors and actresses are not too burdened with vocals. This is because there is a sound engineer who installs a clip on for each player, and a boom mic to cover the atmosphere. The results of this sound recording will be edited by a sound engineer so that they can produce the desired sound.

    2. Body Movement

    In simple terms, the stage acting of the player’s gestures will be more exaggerated than the film acting. Why? Because stage acting must be good at representing characters and emotions so that the audience feels close to the ongoing story.

    Gesture and flexibility of body movements must be owned by an actor and actress who performs stage acting. An actor or actress who does film acting tends to be able to adapt from everyday habits, especially if the story is a drama. The gestures and gestures of film actors can be covered from various camera angles so that the audience is able to feel the emotion and closeness to the story and the characters.

    3. Facial expressions and expressions

    Facial expressions and facial expressions are similar, but not the same. Expression is an expression of feelings shown through body movements, speech and face. Facial expressions are more detailed than just expressions. Facial expressions can show eye glances, forehead wrinkles, cheek movements, mouth, jaw and neck continuously to form an expression.

    In stage acting, actors and actresses must have clear facial expressions and expressions. Eye play is one of the biggest supporting factors for expressing an expression. The eyes are the center of all expressions, ranging from feelings of anger, sadness, happiness, can radiate through the eyes. On stage performances, an actor and actress must be able to express all the feelings of the play he is playing. Expressions and facial expressions must be clear and strong, because they will affect the audience.

    In contrast to film acting, actors and actresses must have strong facial expressions and expressions but don’t have to overdo it like stage acting. This is because in film acting, actors and actresses will be exposed from many camera angles. Facial expressions and expressions must be able to convey to the audience, especially if you are acting in a drama or expressing sadness. So, if an actor or actress acting on camera can touch the audience’s heart to feel sad, then the story and acting are successful.

    4. Blocking

    The difference between stage acting and subsequent films is blocking . If actors and actresses are performing a stage act, they must be aware of the presence of the audience. This is because they must be able to tell the story well to the audience in front of them directly. Apart from the audience, actors and actresses acting on stage must be sensitive to the presence of the documentation team.

    Actors and actresses on stage cannot be aware of the camera, even though they know that there is a team of documentation, both photos and videos covering them. Blocking is very important in stage acting, considering that actors and actresses will import a lot and adapt their actions to one another. Coupled with the presence of an audience, the players may not turn their backs to the audience, because it will greatly disrupt the ongoing show.

    Blocking actors and actresses in film acting can be done repeatedly. This is very different from stage acting. Blocking is done during the recce , reherseal on location can even be done on the day of shooting. Blocking actors and actresses can also change when there is a change in location or set. This is because there are technical matters that are highly considered, it could be a matter of location, sets, camera techniques, or other technical divisions. Blocking film acting is required not to be aware of the camera, unless there is a concept that requires a subjective camera as the main character.

    5. Improvisation

    Stage acting and film acting certainly have a different kind of improvisation. Stage acts improvise when three things happen. First, when actors and actresses forget dialogue, they must be able to improvise. Actors and actresses must be sensitive to harmonize improvisation with their opponent’s dialogue according to the scenario that is running.

    Second, improvisation is done when an opponent forgets the dialogue or blocks it wrong . As a stage actor and actress, he must be able to cover up mistakes that occur on stage by improvising. Third, actors and actresses must be able to improvise in the event of an accident on a stage, for example, a player’s wardrobe falls off, a player falls, and so on.

    The sensitivity of the improvisation of an actor and actress on stage is intended so that the audience can still enjoy the presentation of the story without being disturbed by unwanted things. Actors and actresses who do film acting can improvise dialogue, but rarely can improvise scenes. This is due to careful planning through making floor plans, story boards , and blocking players. Dialogue improvisation is also carried out if there are words that are difficult to pronounce, then dialogue sentences can be simplified.

    So, those were 5 differences between stage and film acting. This difference can be used for your acting practice too, you know. Interested in learning and playing acting? Don’t hesitate to continue to develop the talents you have, OK?

  • What is Accumulation? Definition, Types, and How to Count

    Definition of accumulation – Accumulation is a periodic addition, for example returns or deposit interest . Have you heard the term accumulation? You may often encounter the word accrual when saving or buying items with rewards and points that can be accumulated. However, you still don’t know what accumulation is. Check out the following explanation.

    Definition of Accumulation

    According to the Big Indonesian Dictionary, accumulation is defined as collecting, hoarding, accumulating; as capital. In another sense, in general, accumulation is the activity of accumulating something for the purpose of generating higher returns in the future.

    In economics, accumulation is the periodic addition of capital from interest or other sources to principal to create more output or income in the future. In general, accumulation refers to the acquisition or getting of something with the same goal, i.e. greater success in the future.

    A simple example of accumulation practice is when buying an item. Usually when you shop, there will be offers to buy by collecting points and rewards . Later it will be accumulated and exchanged for a number of products with certain achievements.

    Types of Accumulation

    1. Capital Accumulation

    Capital accumulation is an activity that aims to achieve greater income or production in the future by saving part of the income and then reinvesting it.

    The profits can be in the form of interest, profits, rent, capital gains , royalties or other types of benefits.

    Capital accumulation focuses on increasing existing wealth through profitable investments and savings. This investment is concentrated in various ways throughout the economy. One method of capital growth is the purchase of tangible goods that stimulate production.

    This activity is the basis of the capitalist economic system, in which all economic activities are planned and prepared to raise capital. In other words, all investments are made to achieve financial gain.

    Capital accumulation can include physical assets such as machinery, labour, research and development which can increase production. In financial assets, capital accumulation can include stocks and bonds. Another important factor in capital accumulation is price appreciation.

    Measure capital accumulation

    Measurement of capital accumulation is done by calculating or measuring changes in asset values. For businesses, they will consider reinvesting profits back into the business.

    Depending on the type of business, this could be investing in tangible assets or human capital, and then determining the added value of that reinvestment. The capital structure and capital strength of a company can be determined by analyzing its financial statements.

    In Marxist economics and accounting, capital accumulation is often seen as an investment in the form of income or savings. This is especially true for the real means of production. The result of capital accumulation is centralization and centralization.

    For economic growth, it is often necessary to accumulate capital, both financial and non-financial, because more capital is required for additional production to increase the scale of production.

    More productive and wiser organizations can even increase their output without spending more capital. Capital creation does not always require additional investment. This can be done by improving the organization or by inventions that increase productivity, increase real estate sales, etc.

    As an example :

    companies that want to increase production capacity to boost economic growth in the short term. The method used is to increase physical capital to produce goods and services through bank loans or by issuing capital as a source of funding.

    The relationship between capital accumulation and the economy

    In the Harrod-Domar model of economic growth , an increase in the saving rate allows for more investment. This ultimately leads to higher rates of economic growth in the short and medium term.

    The answer is still controversial. Some economists, such as Solow, argue that increasing capital does not lead to long-term sustainable growth, as the Solow growth model proves.

    Instead, the rate of growth is determined by the rate of population growth and the rate of technical (technological) progress. Indeed, the ratio of capital to labor is assumed to experience a marginal downward trend.

    When the ratio of capital to labor is high (as in developed countries), the contribution of additional capital to economic growth is relatively small compared to when the ratio of capital to labor is low, as in developing countries.

    One example of capital accumulation

    The Government of the Republic of Indonesia intends to increase domestic food production by increasing farmers’ vegetable production. First, the Indonesian government is investing in infrastructure in the form of road construction.

    In addition, the government is investing again by providing new tractors to farmers. Investing in road construction and buying new tractors for farmers is to accumulate capital for the Indonesian government so that future vegetable production will be abundant and national food production will increase. This is in accordance with the accumulation goal to achieve great results in the future.

    2. Parking Accumulation

    Parking accumulation is the total number of vehicles at a given location. This parking space accumulation information is needed to control and plan parking space requirements in an area.

    Parking accumulation information surveys should be carried out to obtain a history of vehicles parked at any given time. Parking varies depending on the location of the business with parking/buildings, such as offices, shopping centers and apartments.

    Parking accumulation survey

    To obtain parking accumulation information, it is necessary to conduct a survey to obtain the history of parked vehicles in a day, the highest achievement level of the number of parked vehicles is called the highest parking accumulation.

    This amount varies depending on the event with parking/building. Offices peaked during the day, while the accumulation of shops/malls during the week was lower than the weekend accumulation in the afternoon, and the accumulation of housing/apartments at night.

    Great accumulation

    The amount of accumulated parking is given by the following formula:

    Where:

    AP is accumulated parking

    Ei is the number of vehicles that enter the parking lot

    Ex is a lot of vehicles leaving the parking lot

    If there were cars previously parked in the lot, then there are lots of cars so the cumulative number present is added to the parking lot.

    The vehicles that are inside are occasionally there. Because the vehicle arrived before the inspection or there was a damaged vehicle that was left overnight by the owner.

    Where :

    N = the number of vehicles that existed before

    When carrying out the survey

    When conducting a survey, it depends on the type of event where the survey is implemented, such as in the office, the event is dominated during working hours, at the market in the morning, schools at the entrance and after school, lodging/apartments at night.

    3. Accumulated Fees

    Cost accumulation is a method used to determine the total cost of a service or product. There are two types of accrued expenses, namely:

    Order Cost Accumulation

    Order costing is a method used to aggregate the cost of a product in which costs are aggregated for each separate order or contract or service and each order or contract can be segregated on the basis of its identity.

    This cumulative ordering cost can be applied to companies using discontinuous manufacturing processes such as; construction work, workshops, printing, catering, furniture , etc.

    Process Cost Accumulation

    Process cost accumulation is a method for aggregating product costs by aggregating costs for each specific unit of time. This process cost accumulation can be applied to companies that use continuous production processes, such as; auto assembly companies, pharmaceuticals, airlines, hospitals, etc.

    Both an actual costing system and a predetermined costing system can be used in order and process costing.

    4. Accumulated Depreciation

    Accumulated depreciation is an accounting term that refers to the decline in value of an asset due to its use over a period of time. Examples include buildings, mining equipment, and office electronics such as laptops and printers.

    In the financial statements there are two values ​​of depreciation, namely depreciation expense and accumulated depreciation. Depreciation costs are the calculated use or benefits of capital assets.

    Meanwhile, accumulated depreciation is a collection of periodic depreciation expenses. The two are also different in financial recording, where the depreciation expense must be recognized in the income statement and the accumulated depreciation must be recorded in the balance sheet.

    The accumulated depreciation in the first year of use of fixed assets is the same as the depreciation in the first year of use of fixed assets. Then, in the second year of use, the accumulated depreciation is the result of the total depreciation of fixed assets in the first and second years. The same goes for the third year and so on.

    In financial statements, the essence of accumulated depreciation is to reduce the value of fixed assets. Use automated accounting applications to support real-time and efficient business financial reporting.

    Variables in Accumulated Depreciation Calculations

    Acquisition Fee:

    costs incurred by the company to purchase fixed assets, including the purchase price plus various other costs, such as transportation, installation, assembly, etc.

    Residual value:

    Estimated or residual value of fixed assets after use. This residual value is not fixed, so fixed assets have no residual value. This is because when the withdrawal deadline arrives, it is not always possible for the asset to be sold and left alone.

    This is of course not recommended. It would be better if idle assets were sold or recycled, to extend their value function.

    Book price or historical value:

    The price at the time of acquisition of the asset, is the acquisition cost by deducting the accumulated depreciation of fixed assets over the economic life of the fixed assets.

    Economic age:

    Estimated useful life of fixed assets or useful life of fixed assets. It is divided into two, namely physical age and functional age.

    Age indicates that the condition still looks good even though its function has decreased. Meanwhile, functional age is related to the usefulness of an asset. Assets serve a lifetime if they are still active and able to contribute to the business.

    Shrinkage Type

    depreciation

    Depreciation is a widely used method and is similar to the straight-line method in terms of depreciation. The trick is to do a systematic sum and then divide the useful life of the asset.

    Usually, this depreciation is applied to assets that have different physical forms, such as computers, laptops, cars, motorbikes, furniture, printers, production machines, machines, copiers, and many other assets.

    Amortization

    Unlike depreciation, the amortization method can be applied to a variety of intangible assets, such as patents, trademarks, franchises for goodwill.

    Based on the Reporting of Financial Accounting Standards (PSAK), the useful lives of various assets affected by amortization may not exceed 20 years. The reason is simple, because 20 years is a very long time, there is a possibility that assets valued during that period will no longer have economic value after 20 years.

    depletion

    If in the previous explanation we have understood the explanation between tangible and intangible assets. So, in this type of amortization, assets experience a real decrease that consumes benefits and materials.

    A simple example of a depleted asset is a company’s natural resources. In accounting, assets that are natural resources decline in value, and during the same period, these assets continue to experience a decrease in physical value.

    How to calculate accumulated depreciation

    There are several ways to calculate this accrual, including the straight-line method and the declining balance method. Based on the accumulated depreciation from the EMBA journal, the following is the accumulated depreciation formula:

    Straight line method

    Depreciation expense is calculated on a straight-line basis, using the assumption that each asset can provide a reasonable contribution or benefit, without fluctuations over its useful life.

    The rate of decline in these assets will be the same every year, so the value of these assets will be deducted from their value in use. For this reason, this method is suitable when used to calculate the depreciation of fixed assets where wear and tear will not be affected by the finished product.

    The formula for calculating it is as follows:

    D = (AC – SV)/LT

    Information:

    D = depreciation

    AC = acquisition price

    SV = residual value

    LT = economic life

    Declining balance method

    The declining balance method is based on the assumption that each fixed asset has the potential to make a significant contribution at the outset of its use. As the economic life decreases, the degree of decline in asset function will also increase.

    This method is suitable for asset classes where usage will be affected by the volume of product produced. The formula for calculating this decreasing balance is as follows:

    D = d% x BV

    d% = 1 – n√SV/AC

    Information:

    D = depreciation

    d% = depreciation rate

    BV = previous book price

    SV = residual value

    AC = acquisition price

    Should be used in cost calculations and also for accumulated depreciation if it can be adjusted to the type of assets used in the calculation.

    In addition, the consistency of using this method will also make depreciation expense easier to measure and record in financial reports, both income statements and balance sheets, using mathematics will be more accurate.

    The difference between depreciation expense and accumulated depreciation

    After we know the depreciation expense together, the method is different, do you know the difference between depreciation expense and accumulated depreciation?

    Basically, the difference between the two is the time period. Accumulated depreciation is the total accumulated depreciation expense for one period or one year. This account has a deduction that in the first year the accumulated depreciation will equal the depreciation expense of business property in one year.

    However, for the second year or so, you can get the accumulated depreciation from the first year by adding up the accumulated depreciation of the second year. You just need to credit it to a reconciliation account, whether it’s office equipment, transportation, or other assets that are in a depreciable condition.

    Accumulating Wealth By Investment

    There are several advantages of investing over saving a certain amount, where the investment can always grow in the future. A simple example, when depositing 1 million in a savings bank, there won’t be much addition. In contrast to investment, with 1 million it will grow by about 20% per year. This proves that investing can be an option to accumulate wealth quickly.

  • What is a Turbocharger? Functions, Benefits, and How It Works

    What is a Turbocharger? Functions, Benefits, and How It Works

    Turbocharger function in diesel engines – Speaking of turbochargers, four-wheeled vehicle lovers will know the name. Turbochargers are often found in four-wheeled vehicles with diesel engines, such as trucks and other four-wheeled vehicles that use diesel engines. Turbocharger is also a very important component in diesel cars, because it is capable of producing very high power.

    Diesel cars usually have turbo engines. The goal is to increase engine power and the sound produced becomes smoother. Turbo itself is a forced intake system that can increase engine power by utilizing exhaust gas from the engine.

    Best Turbocharger Manufacturers and Suppliers in the World

    However, the turbo on a diesel engine can fail due to several factors. Some of them are due to damaged gaskets, too much engine oil burning and rarely paying attention to cleaning the air filter.

    As proof of the existence of this one component, it is certain that the car’s diesel engine does not have any residual power or strong engine power. So, for the discussion this time, we will try to discuss what is a turbocharger? functions, benefits, and how it works on diesel engines.

    For this reason, in this discussion, we have collected information about turbocharger sundries and their various functions that are interesting to discuss.

    Further related information you can see below!

    What is Turbocharger?

    A turbocharger is a centrifugal compressor that gets its power from a turbine powered by vehicle exhaust. Often used in internal combustion engines to increase engine power and efficiency by increasing the air pressure entering the engine. The main advantage of turbochargers is that they significantly increase engine power for just a little extra weight.

    The turbocharger was invented by Swiss engineer Alfred Büchi. His patent for a turbocharger was applied for in 1905. Locomotives and ships with diesel and turbocharged engines began to be seen in the 1920s.

    The disadvantage of gasoline engines is that the compression ratio must be reduced (to avoid exceeding maximum compression and to avoid knocking), which reduces the efficiency of the engine at low power. Specially designed turbocharged diesel engines do not have this drawback. However, when operating at altitude, the increase in turbocharger power greatly affects the total output of the two types of engines. It’s the latter factor that makes turbocharged aircraft engines so profitable; and this is the first idea to develop this tool.

    The engine component has three main parts: turbine wheel, compressor wheel and camshaft. The turbine wheel with the blades rotates with exhaust gas pressure, then through the rotating shaft of the turbine wheel, the compressor wheel also rotates with the blades in such a way as to pump air into a solid mass. Since these components frequently rotate in excess of 80,000 rpm, good lubrication is essential.

    In 1970, Mercedes Benz launched a turbocharged car, namely the Mercedes Benz 300 SD, followed by the Chevrolet Corvair Monza and Oldsmobile Jetfire which pioneered the emergence of turbocharger technology in the automotive world.

    It can be said that since the introduction of cars with the principle of operating a turbocharger, the social stigma towards turbocharged diesel engines has changed.

    Turbocharger is a part of a diesel engine that is useful for increasing engine power due to the volumetric efficiency of air entering the combustion chamber.

    The working principle of the turbocharger is forced induction with the main stock, using air from the exhaust of the vehicle, which is fed and directed to the combustion chamber.

    Forced induction or forced induction itself is a process where compressed air is supplied and directed to the engine intake to burn fuel in the combustion chamber.

    Puts extra pressure to produce power in the form of better engine efficiency. The turbocharger also has turbo pressure sensor technology which functions as a manifold pressure reading, which is then changed by the engine ECU to increase the amount of fuel injected by the injectors.

    Turbocharger function?

    One way to increase the power/efficiency of a diesel engine is to use a turbocharger. The working principle of the turbocharger is to use exhaust gas heat as energy to compress the combustion air so that high power is achieved. The exhaust gas from the combustion of each cylinder is then directed through the exhaust manifold, which then expands to the turbine-side turbocharger, creating mechanical energy which is then used as power to rotate the fan-side turbocharger.

    Now that the fan is on the intake side, the combustion air increases on the intake manifold side of the diesel engine. A powerful car engine requires a larger number of cylinders than usual. Therefore, it is natural for sports or racing cars to have more cylinders than cars of other classes.

    Cars with 6 cylinders, 8 cylinders, even 12 cylinders are suitable for sports or racing cars. The role of the cylinder in a car is to store fuel and oxygen, which are then burned to produce better and bigger engine power.

    No wonder if you want to get maximum performance from a car engine, you need a large number of cylinders. What about cars with less than 6 cylinders? Can’t get more car performance? Of course it can be equipped with a turbocharger that uses the principle of forced induction or forced induction.

    By forcing a certain amount of air into the cylinder chamber through the compression process, the air in the cylinder chamber which is then burned becomes denser and contains more oxygen, resulting in much greater power after combustion.

    It is not surprising that the turbocharger increases engine torque and power, improves fuel economy, improves engine power characteristics that are initially small or large, but can still reduce engine emissions.

    Turbocharger Benefits

    1. Fuel efficient, because the rest of the combustion is compressed and returned to the combustion chamber

    Installing a turbocharger on a diesel car that has been required and proven by several test results shows that a machine with perfect technology can reduce fuel consumption.

    2. More environmentally friendly, because there is a lot of air in the engine, so the combustion process is more optimal

    The presence of this technology is not only economical, but can reduce most of the emissions, making diesel cars more environmentally friendly, even the emissions that are visible when the engine is running. active, not as dense as a car without a turbocharger.

    3. Increasing diesel engine power

    The third advantage is that the car’s performance has obviously improved because the exhaust heat can be reused to make the engine more efficient, making the car more powerful and have a stronger performance.

    4. Engine noise is reduced because the exhaust duct is used to turn the turbine

    The sound of a real diesel engine is loud because of the large movement, with the turbo the sound is still smooth, but still has a manly aura because of the distinctive sound of the turbocharger.

    5. Not Wasteful of Fuel

    More economical in terms of fuel consumption, so you can travel freely without having to go back and forth to gas stations.

    6. Reducing power loss at altitude because the air at altitude is very thin, so the amount of air entering the turbocharged engine is stable

    Getting a turbocharger for a diesel engine has a huge advantage, especially for those of you who live in the mountains, because the way this technology works can increase the amount of air that enters the engine, even though the air is very thin. outside the car.

    7. Optimum combustion process engine structure. small and light turbocharger, but always very high power 30-60 %

    The light and small size of the turbocharger certainly makes the car cleaner under the hood, but on the other hand, such a large output power can also be increased.

    The use of turbochargers in diesel engines has many advantages, so it is not surprising that currently there are many cars on the market equipped with this technology, such as MPVs or city cars.

    also read : Best Turbocharger Manufacturers and Suppliers in the World

    How do turbochargers work?

    Turbochargers use the air flow generated by burning exhaust gases as an energy source. Air flows through the turbine then rotates the compressor. The resulting rotation can reach up to 150 thousand revolutions per minute. The rotating speed is 30 times higher than normal engine without turbo. However, a new turbocharger or turbo works when the engine is running at a certain speed.

    The new turbine turns when there is sufficient pressure on the exhaust gases. When the engine speed or RPM increases, the exhaust gas comes out. When the exhaust gas flow increases, the turbine also rotates faster. Turbo engines are usually equipped with an inter-radiator which stores the heat generated by the turbine rotation. The intercooler shrinks the molecules, lowering the air temperature at the inlet. The smaller the air molecules in the intake, the bigger the air molecules in the engine and the stronger the power.

    The turbocharger unit consists of two blades or a turbine on a single shaft mounted on the side of the exhaust manifold. One blade or turbine is connected to the exhaust duct, while the other blade or turbine is mounted relative to the inlet air.

    The two blades are in the form of wings, where when one of the blades or turbine rotates, the blade or turbine on the other side also rotates.

    Here is how the complete turbocharger works, which can be listened to below:

    1. How the turbine works

    The first relates to exhaust gas flow, meaning that the exhaust rotates when the car engine is started because the exhaust gas energy flows through the blades.

    The cylinder of a car engine under pressure throws the exhaust gases of combustion into the stream and drives the first blade or turbine.

    As in a cochlea in nature, when the first blade rotates automatically, the blade connected to the air inlet or compressor also rotates.

    2. The second mode of operation

    A turbine or blade or rotary compressor connected to the intake air stream compresses the air by sucking it into the passing air.

    The more exhaust energy that enters the first turbine, the greater the rotation of the second blade in the intake air stream.

    The reason is that when the turbine rotates more air enters. You can measure it by using the turbo pressure sensor to detect the manifold pressure sent to the engine ECU.

    At certain engine speeds, the turbine shaft can rotate up to 80,000 rpm.

    3. The third mode of operation

    Compressed air has a higher temperature. With warmer air, the air density is lower and it is less accurate to undergo the combustion process in the combustion chamber.

    Therefore, you should also install an intercooler that cools the compressed air before it enters the combustion chamber or cylinder.

    The shape of the intercooler is similar to a radiator which is placed in front of the car to allow outside air to easily reach, which facilitates cooling of the internal air.

    After the compressed air is cooled through the intercooler, it is forced into the combustion chamber or cylinder.

    Top Rated Turbocharger Repair Services – Find the Best Near You

    4. The fourth way of working

    The air entering the cylinder chamber has a higher oxygen content and denser air intensity, which helps speed up the combustion process in the cylinder chamber. The throttle, however, monitors the air entering the combustion chamber, so it knows exactly how much air is needed based on how deep the throttle is depressed.

    It should be noted that while high turbine speeds are good for engine acceleration, they can affect boost pressure to some extent.

    To avoid this, you can install a protector in the form of an exhaust valve, which is used to bypass the exhaust flow according to the turbocharger pressure.

    5. Fifth Operation Mode

    Looking at several turbocharger components such as air flow meter, turbo pressure sensor, throttle position, engine speed sensor, the turbocharger generates the engine ECU.

    The engine ECU calculates the exact amount of fuel that must be injected into the combustion chamber to achieve maximum efficiency of the car engine.

    In addition to engine power at maximum power, there is residual gas in the cylinder after combustion, which is discharged to reuse the turbine in the same way.

    How to Care for Turbochargers in Diesel Engines

    Car owners should be aware that turbochargers have a lag or lack of power from the turbo until a certain speed is reached. So even if you press the gas pedal hard, but because you haven’t reached a certain speed, the acceleration will feel like there was a pause right at the start. Here are (four) ways to care for a turbocharger engine:

    1. Timely Oil Change

    Turbocharger damage can actually be prevented by carrying out routine scheduled maintenance. It is recommended to check the engine oil change intervals regularly so that the quality of the engine oil is maintained and the oil filter can function normally. You can also check the engine oil pressure and keep the air filter clean.

    2. Diligently check the volume of engine oil

    One of the causes of damage to the turbo is old iron that gets into the turbine because the old engine oil is not replaced. On the other hand, a lack of engine oil can quickly damage a turbo. Extreme exhaust temperature due to failure of the cranking system or fuel injection can damage the turbo components.

    3. Get used to engine idling before turning off the engine

    The turbocharger is in a high temperature area because it uses exhaust gas energy. If you park your car immediately after driving at high speed, heat can build up in the engine bay. This happens because there is no more air flowing in the engine room. It is difficult to adapt the turbo to these conditions and can shorten the life of the turbo. Thus, after traveling at high speed, the car must be slowed down for the rest of the route.

    Do not immediately park the car and turn off the engine. This can make the turbo adaptable to high temperatures but less airflow in the engine bay.

    4. Clean/Replace Air Filter

    Always keep the intake manifold turbo air filter clean. In this way we must diligently check the condition of the air filter and clean it if it is dirty.

    If the air filter must be replaced regularly at each maintenance schedule, so that the air entering the intake through the turbo is also clean and the engine condition is maintained.

    Conclusion

    That’s all for a brief discussion of what a turbocharger is, its functions, benefits, and how it works. Not only knowing what a turbocharger is, but also discussing the functions, benefits, working methods and proper maintenance methods so that the engine is maintained.

    Knowing what a turbocharger is for automotive enthusiasts is very useful in knowing the capacity of diesel engine-based vehicles so that they are properly cared for so that the vehicle is maintained and works optimally when used.

    That’s a review of turbocharged engines. For Sinaumed’s who want to understand turbochargers and other knowledge related to the automotive world, you can visit sinaumedia.com to get related books.

  • What is a Traveling Wave? Check out the Characteristics and Full Explanation!

    Traveling Waves – Has Sinaumed’s ever casually thrown rocks into a pond or river? After being thrown with a stone, what happens to the water level of the pond or river? Did Sinaumed’s see any small circles forming where the rock fell?

    If so, try to pay more attention, later the small circles will widen to move away from the center point. Even if Sinaumed’s throws a leaf above the surface of the water, the circles can actually move the leaf up and down.

    Well, that’s a description of the existence of waves that propagate on the surface of the water though. The discussion of these waves is included in the study of Physics which divides them into several types based on the medium, direction of propagation, and amplitude. In this type of wave based on its amplitude, it can be divided into 2 namely traveling waves and stationary waves. So, what is a traveling wave? What are the formulas and examples of questions regarding these types of waves according to the study of Physics? Come on, look at the following reviews so that Sinaumed’s understands these things!

    What is a Wave?

    Before discussing traveling waves, Sinaumed’s must first understand what a wave is in the study of Physics. Basically, waves are vibrations that propagate either through a medium or not through a medium. If the vibrations of the wave propagate through the medium, then the wave will be transverse and longitudinal, while if it does not pass through the medium, it will be electromagnetic. Waves will later propagate vibrations without moving the particles, so the particles will only move around the balance point.

    Types of Waves

    The existence of this wave can be divided into several types, namely:

    Based on Medium

    1. Mechanical Waves , namely waves that require a medium to propagate its vibrations. Example: ocean waves, sound waves, and others.
    2. Electromagnetic waves , namely waves that do not need a medium to propagate their vibrations. Example: light waves.

    Based on the Direction of Propagation

    1. Transverse waves , namely waves that are perpendicular to the direction of propagation. Example: light waves.
    2. Longitudinal waves , namely waves that are in the same direction as the direction of propagation. Examples: surface waves, sound waves, spring waves, and others.

    Based on the Amplitude (Farthest Deviation Distance)

    1. Traveling Waves , namely waves that have a fixed amplitude.
    2. Stationary waves (silent) , namely waves that have a changing amplitude.

     What is a Traveling Wave?

    After understanding the definition of waves and their types according to physics studies, Sinaumed’s will then learn about what a traveling wave is.

    As previously explained, a traveling wave is a type of wave based on its amplitude, that is, a wave that has a fixed amplitude (farthest distance). That is, every point through which the wave will vibrate harmonicly with the same amplitude. A simple example of applying this traveling wave is when Sinaumed’s plays with a vibrating rope, aka battle ropes . On a string that is continuously vibrated, the amplitude will always be the same.

    Since this traveling wave material is included in the study of Physics, then of course it will have an equation in the form of a formula, namely:

    The Equation of Deviations in the Traveling Wave

    When Sinaumed’s is playing with a rope or is exercising battle ropes , surely the longer the vibrating rope will form a traveling wave. The wave will propagate from point 0 as the center of the coordinates, towards the positive x-axis direction, so it will look like the following figure.

    In the figure, it can be seen that point 0 has vibrated periodically for t (time) seconds. Therefore, the wave deviation at point 0 will also meet the harmonic vibration deviation, which is written in the form of the formula:

    Information:

    y = wave displacement or vibration deviation of the point through which it passes (m)

    A = amplitude or farthest deviation distance (m)

    ω = angular velocity (rad s-1)

    ω   = 2πf, where f is the vibration frequency (Hz)

    t = the length of time point 0 has vibrated (s)

    If Sinaumed’s pays attention once again, ω =2πf so that it can also be written in the form, then the equation can also be written in the formula form

    Then, what if Sinaumed’s wants to find the wave phase? Of course there is a separate formula, namely:

    So it can be concluded that the deviation equation on the traveling wave is:

    Through this formula, it can be concluded with the sign in front of the Amplitude A and the number k, namely to be

    +𝐴 means the initial upward deviation of the wave

    – 𝐴 means the initial deviation of the wave downward

    − 𝑘 means the wave propagates to the right

    + 𝑘 means the wave propagates to the left

    Velocity Equation On Traveling Waves

    In a traveling wave, the velocity equation can be derived from the displacement equation described earlier. Mathematically, the speed equation found in a traveling wave is:

    Information:

    v = wave speed (m/s)

    y = wave deviation (m)

    The Equation of Acceleration on a Traveling Wave

    So, what about the acceleration equation on a traveling wave? Of course it will be derived from the deviation equation or the velocity equation. Mathematically, the acceleration equation found in this traveling wave can be formulated as follows.

    Information:

    a = wave acceleration (m/s2)

    v = wave speed (m/s)

    y = wave deviation (m)

    The properties of a traveling wave

    Reporting from around knowledge , traveling waves have certain properties, namely.

    1. Diffraction (Deflected)

    The traveling wave will certainly be diffraction in the form of deflection of the wave when it passes through a certain gap. This deflection will be more clearly seen if the middle wave passes through a narrower gap.

    2. Refraction (Refraction)

    Refraction, aka refraction, is when there is a shift in the direction of wave propagation which is caused because the medium through which it passes has a different density. This can occur in traveling waves.

    3. Polarization (Absorbed Vibration Direction)

    Polarization is when there is absorption of the wave vibration direction when it is passing through a certain medium. In traveling waves in the form of sound, this property will usually occur when passing through a flexible medium such as foam or sponge.

    4. Reflection (Reflected)

    Reflection that occurs in traveling waves can be in the form of reversing the direction of wave propagation. This is due to a collision with a medium which turns out to be impenetrable by the wave itself.

    5. Interference (Combined)

    Wave interference or merging can occur in traveling waves. If there are 2 waves that are combined and have the same phase, then both will get amplification. For example: a rope wave that has the same phase, the amplitude will be even greater.

    6. Dispersion (Shape Change)

    Dispersion can occur in the form of changes in waveforms, especially when passing through a particular medium.

    The Difference between Running Waves and Stationary Waves

    Many people cannot distinguish between traveling waves and stationary waves (standing waves). Although both are included in the type of wave with the amplitude category, the definitions and explanations between the two are also different. Well, here’s the difference.

    No. Walking Wave Stationary Wave
    1. It has the same amplitude (farthest deviation distance) and phase, especially at every point it passes. Has variable amplitude (farthest deviation distance) and phase.
    2. An example is a wave that propagates on a long string. An example is the wave on the strings of a guitar instrument.
    3. Have a deviation equation. Has a knot and belly section on the waves.
    4. There is only one type, namely the traveling wave itself. It can be divided into 2 types, namely fixed end stationary waves and free end stationary waves.
    5. Can spread to the right and self with different equations. Frequency and amplitude meet in opposite directions.

    Well, that’s a review of what a traveling wave is along with the equation formula, its properties, and the difference between it and a stationary wave. Can Sinaumed’s name any other examples?

    Source:

    https://www.zenius.net/

    Class XI Physics Module. Traveling and Stationary Waves .

    Physics Teaching Materials for Class XI Semester II High School: RUNNING WAVES AND STATIONARY WAVES . Padang 9 Public High School.

    Sujoko. (2020). High School Physics Learning Module: Walking Waves & Stationary Waves . Ministry of Education and Culture. https://repositori.kemdikbud.go.id/

    Also Read!

    • The formula for fast propagation of waves and examples of problems
    • History, Sources, and Types of Electromagnetic Waves
    • Kinetic Energy Formulas Along with Examples of Problems and their Discussion
    • Definition, Formulas, and How to Convert Mass Units
    • History of Physics and its Definition and Benefits
    • Concept, History, and Examples of Problems About Magnetic Fields
    • Understanding Static Electricity and How It Works
    • Definition, History, and Examples of Archimedes’ Law Problems
    • Get to know what Kirchoff’s Laws 1 and 2 are
  • What is a Student Regiment? Definition and Brief History

    What is a Student Regiment – The student regiment or also known as Menwa is a civilian force that has been trained and prepared to defend the Unitary State of the Republic of Indonesia (NKRI) as a form of the Universal People’s Defense and Security System or also known as Sishankamrata.

    The Menwa or student regiment is one of the components of Indonesian citizens who have received military training in the student element. Some time ago, Menwa had garnered attention because in the process of training, or also known as Menwa basic education, it claimed lives. Actually what is the Student Regiment and what is its history? Listen to the explanation until the end, ok!

    What is a Student Regiment?

    The student regiment or abbreviated as Menwa is one of the civilian forces that has been trained and then prepared, so that its members are able to defend the Unitary State of the Republic of Indonesia as a manifestation of the Universal People’s Defense and Security System or Sishankamrata.

    Student regiments have also become one of the existing components for citizens to receive military training with student elements in them. The headquarters of the student regiment unit command, generally will be in the tertiary institution of the unit of each member who is a student or female student studying or receiving education on the campus.

    Menwa is one of the reserve components of national defense, because they have been given training in military science, such as in the use of weapons, survival or how to survive, military self-defence, battle tactics, parachuting, camouflage, military gymnastics to navigation and other military science training.

    Members of the student regiment are referred to as wiras, who are at each tertiary institution to form units that will become a part of the student organization in student activity units or UKM on a campus. Menwa is also given authority and responsibilities that are different from other SMEs and are directly under the authority of the rectorate.

    Menwa has a motto, namely “Widya Castrena Dharma Siddha” which comes from Sanskrit and has the meaning of perfection, dedication to science and warrior science.

    On this motto, the knowledge that is meant by science in the menwa motto is stated, all kinds of branches of knowledge that members get when they are students.

    This knowledge will be used by the wira to pursue his career path in the future without forgetting his main goal and serving the community. Meanwhile, warrior knowledge in the motto is concerned with the souls of officers, knights and leaders and not only skills that can be used for combat or similar activities.

    A Brief History of the Student Regiment

    From 13 June to 14 September 1959, compulsory training was held for students in West Java. In that period of time, students in West Java then received training, so that students were ready to defend the Unitary State of the Republic of Indonesia together with the TNI with the aim of preventing all threats and being ready to fight using weapons according to the military.

    Students who receive compulsory training or walawa are then educated at the Siliwangi Military Command VI. Walawa or students who get compulsory training, then get the right to use the Siliwangi symbol. The walawa were then prepared as reserve officers with the aim that the walawa would be able to support the TNI in the event of a critical situation befalling the Unitary State of the Republic of Indonesia at that time.

    On December 19, 1969 in Yogyakarta Bung Karno as the President of the Republic of Indonesia and the Command of the Great Leaders of the Indonesian Revolution at that time, then sparked Trikora. Because of the formation of the Trikora, all Indonesian people welcomed the command from Bung Karno with great fanfare accompanied by the spirit of revolution to seize West Irian, including the walawa who had been trained at that time.

    Trikora, which was coined by Bung Karno, contains three things as follows.

    • Extend the Saka Merah Putih (Indonesian flag) in West Irian.
    • Thwart the puppet state of Papua.
    • Organize general mobilization.

    Since Trikora resonated, the national vigilance of various factions has grown stronger and peaked until an educational plan emerged, where reserve officers would be present at tertiary institutions.

    Then, two decrees appeared from the Siliwangi Regional Military Commander, then on January 20, 1962 the tertiary institution formed a coordinating body with the name of the Preparatory Body for the Establishment of the VI Siliwangi Dam Multipurpose Student Regiment or abbreviated as the BPP VI Siliwangi Dam Student Regiment with four members, namely as following.

    • drg. R. G Surya Sumantri or Chancellor of Padjadjaran University who acted as coordinator.
    • Isrin Nurdin or Vice Chancellor of the Bandung Institute of Technology and serves as Deputy Coordinator I.
    • Kusdarminto or PR Unpar acts as Deputy Coordinator II.
    • Moch Sunarman from PUS PSYAD and at that time served as secretary.

    Then in February 1962, a ten-week Refreshing Course was held at the Main Infantry Regiment, followed by 14 days of training known as the Pasopati Training.

    After this training, on May 20, 1962, members of the student regiment or Menwa class of 1959 were appointed as the organic part of Kodam VI/SLW by the Pangdam VI/SLW.

    In the four-year work plan, it was stated that the formation of a core cadre was carried out at the beginning of the second semester in the 1962 to 1963 school year. The formation of these cadres also included the formation of a female core cadre. West Java students and female students, especially Bandung, then took part in training in Bihbul, which is where the TNI soldiers were formed. then, this unit from the student Yon as well as from several other colleges and academies was sent to a place under the tutelage of trainers at RINSIL.

    On June 12, 1964, a Decree issued by the Coordinating Minister for Defense and Security Components from Dr. A. H Nasution, the TNI General who at that time authorized the Duaja of the Mahawarman Regiment. The Coordinating Minister himself handed over the Duaja, and Garuda Mahawarman was finally officially established and side by side with the Siliwangi Tigers.

    Purpose of Establishment of Student Regiment

    The Student Regiment is present and included in the ranks of national youth institutions in Indonesia. Menwa’s presence has the intention of being able to galvanize the ‘backbone’ of the nation or students which will lead to life in Indonesia by prioritizing Pancasila and the legal basis of the country, namely the 1945 Constitution.

    The purpose of establishing Menwa can be seen from the basis used by Menwa when it was first coined by General AH Nasution. The basis was the intention to be able to contain communist ideas, then during the development of the Menwa organization, SKEP was issued by the Minister of Defense and Minister of Higher Education and Science in 1963 with the SKEP number, namely M/A/20/1963 regarding Implementation of Compulsory Training and Formation of Student Regiments at University. Then, in 1965 another SKEP was issued by the Coordinating Minister for Defense and Security/Kaad and the Minister of PTIP with the SKEP number M/A/165/1965 regarding the Organization and Procedures of the Student Regiment.

    Student Regiment Dynamics

    In its development, Menwa then experienced ups and downs, where this student organization experienced various kinds of changes and upheavals like other organizations. Changes to the student regiment were made from various sections. Starting from reorganization, repositioning, to re-functioning the organization which was repeatedly carried out, as part of the process of actualization in order to meet and respond to phenomena that occur in the nation and state of Indonesia. The changes that occurred in the student regiment occurred from 1978 until the last, namely in 2000.

    One of the upheavals faced by the Menwa occurred in 1944, when students at various universities in Semarang issued their statements regarding their concern that more acts of violence were being committed by members of the Menwa.

    Because of this concern, students in Semarang demanded the abolition of Menwa and this demand was also supported by several groups in Cipayung, namely PB HMI, PMKRI, GMNI and GMKI.

    This demand arose from students in Semarang, because one of the students at IAIN Walisongo Semarang was known to have been abused by members of the Menwa. Then in 2000, through a referendum, students at IAIN Walisongo rejected the Menwa organization on their campus.

    The protest by IAIN Walisongo students was successful, which resulted in several similar protest actions starting to appear in various other tertiary institutions.

    Finally, the government also stipulated a change in Menwa through a Joint Decree of the Minister of Defense, Minister of National Education and Minister of Home Affairs to designate Menwa as UKM.

    Until October 11, 2000, Menwa coaching as a student activity unit was then handed over to each university. However, the activities carried out by the Menwa are still in collaboration with the TNI Regional Command.

    Menwa Historical Review

    The student regiment was first formed by General Abdul Haris Nasution during the Old Order. when it was formed, Menwa had the main mission and goal, namely to stem the spread of communism in universities.

    With the presence of the Menwa at that time, it was hoped that the real threat posed could wipe out several party organizations based on the PKI with group aliases in universities such as the Concentration of the Indonesian Student Movement (CGMI).

    In accordance with the National Defense Act number 29 of 1954, Kosasih on June 13, 1959 then issued a policy and held Soldier Training with the title Battalion Wala 59, this training and battalion which later became the forerunner or origin of the Indonesian Student Regiment was formed.

    At that time, Battalion 59 Wala was also involved in the posse operation, which crushed the rebellion against DI/TII in West Java. Then in 1963, the name Menwa or Student Regiment became known. The validity of this Menwa is stated in the Joint Decree of the First Minister for Defense and Security or Wampa Hankam and the Minister of Higher Education and Science or PTOP regarding the implementation of compulsory training and the formation of student regiments at universities.

    Then in 1963 the student regiment was finally formed, in accordance with a joint decision by Wampa in the field of Defense and Security with the Minister of PTIP which came from students who had received basic soldiering training, because of this decision Menwa was formed in various provinces and not only in West Java.

    Then in 1967 there were several changes in the main idea which then combined the three forms of DIK HANKAMNAS into one, namely compulsory training for students. Walawa, namely students who have received soldiering training then are voluntary, extracurricular in tertiary institutions with a rector’s recommendation and are selective.

    After the evaluation of the Menwa was held in 1972, then although it was increased to Entrepreneurship Education and Reserve Officer Education through a joint decision of three ministers, namely the Minister of Defense, the Minister of Home Affairs and the Minister of Education and Culture regarding the organization of student regiments in order to involve the people in defending the country. Apart from that, the Menwa is also the responsibility of three departments at once, namely the Ministry of Defense and Security, the Department of P and K and the Ministry of Home Affairs whose implementation procedures have been regulated in accordance with the Joint Decree dated January 19, 1978 regarding the Guidelines for Implementing Student Regiment Organization Development.

    Duties and Functions of Menwa

    Following are the duties and functions of the student regiment as a component in national defense which has the task of planning, compiling and preparing all the potential possessed by students in each province which is at level one to carry out its function as a component of the state reserves. Student regiments, broadly speaking, have the following tasks and functions that must be fulfilled.

    • As one of the components in national defense, it has the task of preparing, compiling and planning all the potential possessed by students in each first-level regional province, in order to carry out the Menwa function as a state reserve component.
    • As one of the components in community protection, Menwa has the duty to prepare, plan as well as compile all the potential of students in each province at level one, in order to carry out its function as Linmas.
    • As a special UKM that is directly under the rectorate of a tertiary institution, Menwa has the duty to assist in building student awareness of defending the country, as well as the smooth running of other activities and programs at the university.

    In addition to the three tasks that must be carried out and fulfilled by members of the student regiment, Menwa also has the following functions:

    • Preparing students to become citizens who have faith and have morals and abilities in the academic and intellectual fields in the fields of science, technology and art, and have insight into defending the country who are able to develop their own potential as one of the components of national defense, the Menwa participates in realizing and maintaining all areas within the Unitary State of the Republic of Indonesia.
    • Help improve and foster the attitude of defending the country and the values ​​of love for the land in society.
    • Assist TNI units to carry out certain security development processes in accordance with applicable regulations in Indonesia, namely laws.
    • Help local government to carry out the functions of Linmas.
    • Help overcome the consequences of natural disasters with evacuation and provide humanitarian assistance.
    • Help find and help in the event of an accident.
    • Together with other students, Menwa helps create life in an orderly and peaceful social environment.

    Those are the seven functions and duties of the student regiment as one of the state reserves.

    So, regarding the student regiment or Menwa, is Sinaumed’s interested in digging deeper? Or does Sinaumed’s want to know what SMEs are in college or other things related to universities?

  • What is a Student Association? This is the full explanation

    What is a Student Association – Sinaumed’s who have just entered college or are about to study at a dream university, of course they are no strangers to the term student association or better known as Hima.

    When you become a student at a university and choose a particular major, Sinaumed’s will meet or even be offered to join as a member of Hima. What exactly is Hima? And what are the activities within the intra-campus organization? Check out the following explanation!

    What is a Student Association?

    The Student Association or Hima is a student organization that is at the department level and includes intra-campus organizations, as well as part of extra-curricular activities that every student can choose from and participate in. The presence of the Student Association organization comes from the principle of, by and for students.

    Hima is a medium for its members to be able to develop the mindset, personality and potential possessed by each student related to scientific disciplines, so that after graduating from college students are ready to go directly into society.

    Basically, there are two Student Associations, namely the Departmental Student Association or HMJ and the Study Program Student Association or HMPS which are at the faculty level and are under the coordination of the Faculty Student Senate or BEM, so that all activities held by HMJ or HMPS must have an affiliation. with programs in the Student Senate.

    Activities held by student associations are usually limited to activities that can be held at the environment or department level, especially activities that have a framework for studying and scientific development in each department. For example, in a Faculty of Education, there will be a PLS student association. and so forth.

    So that in each faculty, there are several student associations that are formed according to the departments in a faculty. However, if there is only one department in a faculty, then if in a faculty there is only one department, there will only be one student association.

    In student association organizations, the management structure consists of five administrators as follows, namely the chairman, vice chairman, secretary, treasurer, and several other board members according to the needs of the student association. Administrators of student associations are generally elected in a general election such as general elections involving all students in a department.

    Therefore, the principles that are carried out and owned by the Student Association are from, by and for students. So thus all the consequences, both costs and and will become the responsibility and burden of each student association, except if there are different policies from student organizations at the level above such as Faculty BEM, Dean or Student Senate.

    Broadly speaking, a student association can be interpreted as an association whose members are students from the same major, and have the same vision, mission and goals.

    Functions and Activities of the Student Association

    As an organization that has the goal of advancing its majors and increasing the potential, mindset and personality of students, student association organizations also have several functions and activities within them to realize these goals.

    1. Develop student abilities

    The first function of the student association organization is to develop student abilities. Hima is present as an organization that provides a platform or place for students to develop their abilities in various fields of science and not only limited to the knowledge studied in the department. However, it also develops abilities in other scientific fields such as art, science to sports.

    The form of developing student abilities carried out by Hima can be seen from the form of activities held. Such as organizing various workshops, competitions, forming clubs and communities to seminars.

    In the activities held, students and members of Hima can develop their abilities well.

    2. Connecting students with university parties

    The second function of the student association is to act as a bridge between students and several higher education institutions. Especially the campus related to the administration of the study program. As a student, of course, Sinaumed’s will encounter moments where Sinaumed’s has to deal directly with the campus to take care of academic and financial issues, such as tuition fees, taking time off, re-registering and so on.

    Apart from being a bridge between students and the campus, student associations can also be a place for students majoring in expressing their aspirations to the department through Hima members.

    Hima is also a collector of information regarding scholarships, student exchanges, and other activities organized by the campus. All of this information was provided by the campus to Hima members who then had the obligation to disseminate this information to students. Thus, the presence of this organization can help establish communication between students and the campus.

    3. Provide solutions to students who have problems

    Aside from being a bridge of communication between students and the campus as well as a source of information related to academics and administration and others, the student association is also an organization that functions to provide solutions to students who have problems.

    The third function of this student association can be seen from the division owned by Hima, namely the Student Welfare Advocacy Division or Adkesma. In particular, the Adkesma division in the student association is in charge of listening and providing solutions to students who complain of having problems. Whether it’s complaints about personal problems such as stress during college or problems related to the campus.

    4. Bringing the good name of the department to external parties of the study program

    The next function of the student association is to bring the good name of the department to outsiders of the department. Student associations have internal activities on campus that aim to develop the potential, mindset and personality of students better, through the Hima work program which includes external programs or commonly known as community service programs.

    The purpose of holding this community service program is to make a real contribution to the environment outside the campus, as well as to maintain relations between universities, especially the wider community.

    Some student association activities related to community service to bring the good name of the department include competitions, holding try outs for high school students, live in, workshops and so on.

    5. Train students and members to organize on a small scale

    The fifth function of the student association is to train students and members of the student association to be able to organize within a small scope.

    When students choose to join a student association, there will be rules that must be obeyed by every member of each division regardless of their position. Thus, the regulations that bind members will make students required to be more disciplined in allocating time, more committed and responsible for the tasks they have as members of student associations as well as being responsible for being a student to complete the study period well.

    Student associations can be a foothold for students who want to organize but are still afraid to take responsibility when joining large-scale organizations.

    So that the student association as an organization in a small scope, can be an exercise for students in organizing before finally deciding to join an organization with a larger scope or scope.

    As a student, Sinaumed’s is of course more mature and has bigger responsibilities too. While still a student, Sinaumed’s has many opportunities and time to hone his talents, potential and mindset.

    Sinaumed’s can choose to become an above average student who has achievements and a mature plan that can be used after graduating from college. Well, this book entitled “Above Average Students” written by Ratih Kartika can be a guide or reference for Sinaumed’s who want to become above average students with a myriad of achievements! So what are you waiting for? Buy and read the book right now at sinaumedia.com!

    Why Should You Join a Student Association?

    Why do you, as a Sinaumed’s student, have to join an organization, be it a small organization such as a student association or even a large scope such as BEM or an off-campus organization? Here are some reasons why Sinaumed’s, as a student, must join a student association organization.

    1. Have the same background

    The first reason Sinaumed’s should consider joining a student association is because of the similar background of each member and prospective members. Student associations, have a more exclusive character and are limited only to students in one department. Thus, only students who come from the same department, study program or department can join the student association. The same background of each of these members will create added value so that each student is able to establish good relationships, personally and organizationally.

    2. Become the closest family on campus

    Even though there are many other organizations at the university, the student association is arguably the closest family that Sinaumed’s has when they are on campus. Why? This is because the student association has a smaller scope, so fellow members of the student association will meet one another more often.

    Not only in organizational activities, but also in class. So that the student association will feel like a home for its members and a family for the students who are members.

    3. Relationships and acquaintances will be more

    By joining a student association, Sinaumed’s can add to relationships and acquaintances. Even though the student association is an organization with a small scope, Sinaumed’s can still add to relationships. Because of course during college, it is impossible for Sinaumed’s to know all of his students just by being in class.

    Therefore, by participating in various activities, even becoming a committee in events held by student associations, Sinaumed’s can add to relationships and acquaintances. At least within the scope of the department and the campus in the department or study program.

    4. Helping the process of study in the academic field

    Joining student associations will make it easier for Sinaumed’s to open up opportunities to be able to strengthen knowledge or scholarship in the field of study that has been taken.

    Together with members of other student associations, Sinaumed’s can form a study group or a group needed when they are about to take part in a scientific work competition or other to increase achievement.

    That way, Sinaumed’s can improve achievement as well as help the academic study process.

    5. Make it easy for yourself to get used to socializing

    As a student, having the skills to be able to socialize is important. In addition, social skills must also be possessed even after graduating from college.

    Social skills include the ability to speak in public, communicate, influence others and so on. The ability to socialize, Sinaumed’s cannot get in the classroom. So to get used to socializing, Sinaumed’s as a student must actively participate in organizations, one of which is the student association.

    6. Closer to the lecturer

    Joining a student association organization will make Sinaumed’s as a student closer to the lecturers. This is because in student associations, usually the activities held will collaborate a lot with the campus such as lecturers.

    An example is such as academic discussion activities with lecturers. So to hold the event, as a member of the student association, Sinaumed’s must be brave and have direct contact with the lecturers so that the activities can run smoothly.

    7. Become a place for discussion

    The seventh reason Sinaumed’s should consider joining a student association is because student associations can be a place for exchanging ideas and discussions.

    Not only to fellow members, but Sinaumed’s can also discuss with lecturers or other parties above the student association to convey Sinaumed’s’ concerns, ideas or aspirations as a student.

    Of course, ongoing discussions are not only about majors or academic fields, but can cover broad themes as well.

    8. Coordination between members is easier

    In contrast to other on-campus organizations that have members with different backgrounds, student associations are closer and fellow members have the same background.

    Thus, the coordination process between divisions will usually be easier. Because each member knows about the activities, courses, classes and other activities that each member participates in.

    This will make matching schedules to meet with members of student associations easier.

    9. Can hone and improve the spirit of leadership

    Even though they are not chairmen or leaders in student associations, students who join student associations can hone their leadership spirit.

    Through activities such as departmental ospects, being a committee in various events, students are used to leading an event or group.

    10. Train mentally

    The tenth reason Sinaumed’s should consider joining a student association is because it can train you mentally as a student so you can behave better.

    That is an explanation of what a student association is, the meaning, functions and activities held by a major student association or study program student association.

    Through student associations or other organizations, Sinaumed’s as students will have many new experiences and new achievements that can be achieved. Apart from participating in organizations, Sinaumed’s can also become an above average student who is active by opening his horizons through reading books.

  • What is a Socialist Economic System & a Socialist Economic Country

    The socialist economic system is an economic system that makes the government a party that plays an important role in controlling and regulating all economic activities. In this system, the government has full power in planning, making economic decisions, and managing all policies aimed at distributing people’s welfare, as well as providing equality in dealing with all people, whether poor or rich.

    The formation of a socialist economic system cannot be separated from the thoughts of Karl Marx and Frederic Engles. The two men began to introduce this economic system through his book entitled The Communist Manifesto . In the book they provide several criticisms of the implementation of the capitalist economic system. Where according to them the economic system raises many internal problems of the state. So it is not feasible to be implemented in a country.

    The capitalist economic system can cause problems between the owners of capital and the workers. In addition, this economic system also presents individuals who always want to compete in economic or production activities. Economic activities in the capitalist economic system are also not supervised by the government. So, the private sector has full control over their business or business.

    Then, the concept of socialism that was born by Karl Marx and Frederic Engles was a first step against the capitalist economic system that has been widely implemented in western countries. The necessary step in replacing the concept of capitalism is for the government to take over all production resources that were previously controlled by individuals or the private sector.

    In a socialist economic system, the government has a significant role in various economic activities. Where the government limits the freedom of individual rights in owning production resources.

    If the government is seen in every economic activity, it will be easier to monitor and also regulate the running of the existing economic system. In addition, the government can also prevent all forms of unhealthy competition and impact on social inequality.

    What is a Socialist Economic System?

    The socialist economic system is an economic system whose implementation is regulated directly by the government. In this system, all economic activities are fully the responsibility of a state or central government.

    Therefore, the socialist economic system is often referred to as a centralized economic system. Where everything must be regulated by the government and commanded from the central government. The government plays a full role in overseeing all economic activities. Learn more in depth through the Institutional Economics book below along with examples of cases in the transportation sector.


    History of the Socialist Economic System

    The origins of the socialist economic system started from the criticism of the capitalist system. In the 19th century, the bourgeoisie ruled the country. This happened under the banner of the capitalist system in Europe.

    They make the state as a tool or force to regulate economic and political and social organizations to fulfill their own interests.

    Then, the bourgeoisie also gained the legitimacy of the church to exploit the workers. The emergence of the industrial revolution at that time had a blessing for factory owners. However, this actually had a negative impact on the workers. Where they become increasingly poor and oppressed. Indeed, not everyone likes the bourgeoisie in acting in such a way. Then, those who do not like the attitude of the bourgeoisie, try to take revenge.

    The laborers and workers demonstrated and went berserk. They express their distaste for the self-serving bourgeoisie. This is what prompted Karl Marx to criticize the capitalist economic system which was deemed incompatible with social aspects.

    But actually, this kind of condition has given rise to various socialist ideas and thoughts. However, of the many socialist experts, the thoughts of Karl Marx are considered more influential. Karl Marx said that if private property rights were abolished, then society would not be separated into several groups, ranging from high to low class. According to him, capitalism is not worthy of being placed in this world.

    Therefore, various revolutionary efforts must be made to abolish capitalism. Where the means of production must be regulated and controlled by the state. It aims to protect the people.

    Characteristics of a Socialist Economic System

    If a country implements a socialist economic system, then the role of the government will appear which regulates and controls all economic activities and ownership of resources. This means that the government is the only economic actor and center of power that has an important role.

    To find out whether a country implements a socialist economic system, you need to know its characteristics. The following are the characteristics of a socialist economic system .

    1. The government regulates all production resources and individual or private parties do not have the rights of authority and freedom in owning existing resources.
    2. There is an assumption of equality of social status, between the poor and the rich are equally entitled to benefit in doing business.
    3. In this economic system, the government is the only party with power in planning and deciding matters related to the economy.
    4. There is no free competition so that the existence of entrepreneurs becomes less in the country.
    5. The government is the center in making decisions on all economic activities. Starting from foreign trade, consumption, distribution, and also investment.
    6. The creation of an equal distribution of social welfare as a whole.
    7. The amount of production is limited, because everything is related to production capabilities and also market needs.


    Advantages and Disadvantages of the Socialist Economic System

    As explained above, the socialist economic system is a form of criticism of the existence of a liberal economic system which led to the emergence of a capitalist society. According to adherents of socialism, the implementation of a capitalist economic system can cause some adverse effects that are felt by the government and the grassroots.

    Therefore, socialists want to continue to feel they have a role in all economic activities. One of them is having the duty to supervise and participate in deciding a policy. That way, the results of all economic activities can be felt by all groups, both the government and all levels of society.

    Advantages of the Socialist Economic System

    1. There are health and educational facilities for all levels of society at a more affordable cost.
    2. There is social equality for all individuals, from the rich to the poor.
    3. Elimination of monopolistic practices in the market.
    4. The creation of equal distribution of income.
    5. Inflation is easier to handle because it is controlled directly by the government.
    6. The government has an important role in conducting and supervising every economic activity.

    Disadvantages of the Socialist Economic System

    1. Economic growth is hampered, because in this economic system only the government is the only market actor.
    2. The number of entrepreneurs is getting smaller due to limited access to resources.
    3. The spirit of innovation and creativity of business actors is reduced. This happens because there is no reward for their creativity.
    4. There are quite high taxes
    5. Each individual is not given the freedom to own existing resources
    6. The availability of products and services is very limited.

     

    Countries Adhering to the Socialist Economic System

    The ongoing cold war that occurred in 1947, made the world powers at that time split into 2 blocks, namely the eastern block and the western block. The eastern block is a block made by the Soviet Union and other European countries, while the western block is a collection block between NATO and the United States.

    With regard to the economic system, the western and eastern blocks have different understandings when establishing a policy regarding the adopted economic system.

    The western block is known for its liberal economic system or commonly known as capitalist society. Meanwhile, the eastern bloc established the notion of a socialist economic system that could create a communist society.

    When viewed from the ideology and objectives of the socialist and liberalist economic systems have conflicting aspects, even though in essence all of these systems have advantages and disadvantages. Until finally the implementation of the two economic systems can create countries that have very strong and stable economic strength.

    The following is the implementation of a socialist economic system in 3 countries which are considered to be more socialist than the others.

    1. China

    The Chinese government has the most influential authority over several policy decisions and economic activities in China.

    However, for some parts of the Chinese government it has exercised capacity over policies that it had previously implemented, for example health care facilities which are currently not subsidized by the government.

    China’s economy initially adhered to a socialist economic system, but slowly the economy underwent many changes along with several policy guidelines aimed at reviving economic stability.

    At this time, China’s economy has adopted a liberal economic system or what is commonly called capitalism, you can see this from the various ways that the government has used to open international free markets.

    Despite the liberal elements, the government of love still labels its own country as one of the countries that support socialism. From the model of the economic system, in fact China has abandoned the pure form of the socialist system.

    You can see the form of socialism from the number of companies in China, around 70% are state-owned enterprises and 30% are owned by the private sector. The progress of the number of private companies is increasing every year. That is what shows the existence of socialist and liberal elements.

    With the transformation of the determination of the economic system, it will have a positive influence on the economy in China, namely positioning China as part of the second country with the largest economic development in the world after America.

    2. North Korea

    The socialist economic system in North Korea can be seen from the government’s complete domination and control of all economic activities.

    These indications show that North Korea is very closed and it is not easy to open up foreign investment in the country, and it can be said that the economic system in North Korea is more socialist than that of China.

    It can be said that the establishment of a socialist economic system in North Korea was not quite successful, considering that until now the country’s economic development has experienced setbacks and is also not better than that of its neighboring country, namely South Korea.

    3. Cuba

    If you know the characteristics of a socialist country so that all of these characteristics are similar, everything can be seen in Cuba. For example, the influence of the government’s role in controlling all economic activities of the country, the existence of health facilities established by the government for its people, and so on.

    Similar to North Korea, Cuba also does not have a stock exchange market so that the Cuban state implements a closed trading system from other countries and limits foreign investment.


    The Basic Concept of Socialism

    The term socialism or also called socialist can refer to several things related to ideology or ideological groups, the economic system to the state. The term began to be used since the early 19th century.

    In English, the term was first used to refer to members of Robert Owen in 1827. In France, the term refers to members of the Saint-Simon doctrine in 1832 which were made famous by J. Regnaud and Pierre Leroux in l’Encyclopédie Nouvelle.

    The term socialism is often used in a variety of different contexts by various groups, but almost all agree that the term stems from the upheaval of industrial workers and farm workers in the 19th to early 20th centuries which stems from the principle of solidarity and strives for an egalitarian society that through the economic system according to him can serve the community rather than just a handful of elites.

    The basic concept of socialism has in fact been developed by Plato in his book Republic. Plato illustrates that the government does not own personal wealth, all that belongs to the state, both production and consumption, is distributed equally among all the people in that country.

    The authority intended to create people’s welfare is clearly illustrated in Plato’s concept. This concept can be used as a basis for the idea of ​​the emergence of socialism in Europe at that time.

    In addition, the socialist economic system also has various influences, both through positive and negative aspects because the community is not fully authorized, and the government has a very important position in this economic system.

    Therefore, the positive influence of this socialist economic system is that equal distribution of welfare is easier and faster to achieve because there are several government interventions in market mechanisms, the economy is more stable under social life so that it is more controlled and calm, and there are no poor and rich people because of economic equality established by the government

    Meanwhile, from a positive point of view, the socialist economic system also has a negative influence, namely economic development is declining because it focuses more on development than equity. So that infrastructure development becomes slow, personal limitations to carry out business activities are limited by the government. That way, the community also functions to assist the government in efforts to develop the economy.

    Even if it’s in a small way, for example doing small business and carrying out your obligations to the government properly. This is because economic development has an influence on economic progress in a country.

    Those are some explanations about the socialist economic system . The economic system in a country does have its advantages and disadvantages. Therefore, a country will choose an economic system that suits their capacity and needs. This is intended so that all people and the government can advance the country’s economy well.

    For Sinaumed’s who want to study economics more deeply, sinaumedia as #FriendsWithoutLimits will recommend several books that can be used as reading references. Here are the economics books that the author recommends.

    Author : Laila Nur Azizah

  • What is a Semicolon? What does this have to do with Self Healing?

    Every language, especially in the written tradition, must have punctuation marks or signs used in the spelling system. Some of the most familiar and almost always present punctuation marks in every text are (.), (,), (?), and (!). You must also understand about the four punctuation marks. However, have you ever heard of the term “semicolon” and know what it means?

    Many people may have used the semicolon symbol. A semicolon is a punctuation mark that is often used in writing, whether in the form of a document or just an upload on social media. However, a semicolon is not just a punctuation mark. The Semicolon is also a symbol of a movement about mental health. The movement is known as the Semicolon Project.

    So, what is meant by a semicolon? Why is this symbol used as a symbol of mental health? Check out the following reviews!

    Definition of Semicolon

    Semicolon is a punctuation mark in the form of a semicolon which has various functions. In Indonesian, the semicolon is used as a substitute or separator for connecting words in similar parts of sentences. Meanwhile, in English semicolon is used as a substitute for conjunctions.

    Quoting a book entitled Grammar Superflash : Mastering Grammar with the Tutoring Method , the semicolon can also be used to separate two or more clauses. The following are examples of sentences using semicolon in English and Indonesian:

    • Mr. Smith decided not to apply the software to the computer office; it was too risky (Mr. Smith decided not to use the software on the office computer; it was too risky).
    • Joe and Sarah were romantic couple; the came to be the symbol of immortal love (Joe and Sarah are a romantic couple; they become the symbol of eternal love).
    • My sister, Dian, was graduated from a state university; she got the cum laude for all subjects.
      (My sister, Dian, graduated from a state university; she earned cum laude for all her subjects).

    In programming languages, semicolon has another meaning. Quoting a book titled Self-taught Javascript Programming by Jubilee Enterprise (2017), a semicolon is a semicolon which is generally used to mark the end of JavaScript code.

    The semicolon is optional, it doesn’t matter if the symbol is not used. Nevertheless, it’s a good idea to use the semicolon symbol so that the Javascript programming lines look neat and easy to understand.

    Here’s an example of using a semicolon in Javascript code:

    2. How to use Semicolon correctly

    There are still many people who do not understand the use of semicolon or semicolon in English. This time we will provide quite important information about how to use the semicolon correctly. In its own use there are some rules that must be observed. Check out some of the ways to use the following semicolon correctly along with some examples:

    a. Semicolon is used to connect two related independent clauses into one sentence

    The first use or function of the semicolon is used to connect two independent clauses that have a relationship and are used as one sentence. Apart from that, what you should know is that the clauses used here are clauses that must be equivalent because when they are used they will become a complete sentence. Then, it can also be replaced with a dot or full stop ( . ).

    So that you better understand how to use semicolon consistently, here are some examples of sentences:

    • Due to this situation, some people are working from home; others still have to go to the office (Because of this situation, some people are working from home; some others have to go to the office) // Due to this situation, some people are working from home. Others still have to go to the office.
    • Vivi went to the café; Bagas went to the library (Vivi went to the cafe; Bagas went to the library) // Vivi went to the cafe. Bagas went to the library (Vivi went to the cafe. Bagas went to the library).

    b. Semicolon is used to connect two independent clauses that are tied with adverbial conjunctions

    The next function of using semicolon punctuation is to connect two independent clauses which are tied with adverbial conjunctions. Maybe there are some of you who don’t know the information about adverbial conjunctions. We will explain briefly.

    Adverbial conjunctions are adverbs or adverbs that function as conjunctions or connecting words. Examples of adverbial conjunctions are hence (therefore), nevertheless (however), accordingly (consequently), henceforth (in the meantime), therefore (therefore), and so on.

    So that you understand more about the use of semicolon in this function, here are some examples that you can pay attention to:

    • Thalia will go to Seoul for a week starting tomorrow; accordingly ther will be no chemical class tomorrow (Ms. Thalia will go to Seoul for a week starting tomorrow; therefore there will be no chemistry class tomorrow).
    • Me and my brother stay at home all day because my Parents told us to clean up the house; meanwhile my sister went on vacation with her friends (me and my younger brother had to be at home all day because my parents told us to clean the house; while my sister went on vacation with her friends).
    • Roni forgets to bring his lunch to school; nevertheless he is still thankful because Nando shared his launch with him (Roni forgot to bring his lunch to school; however he is still grateful because Nando shared his lunch with him).

    The meaning of the Semicolon Project

    The semicolon symbol is a movement that helps sufferers overcome their difficulties. Project Semicolon is the driving force for spreading this movement in a dynamic society through cyberspace. Project Semicolon initiator was first coined by Amy Bleuel in April 2013 who was depressed after the death of her parents who committed suicide.

    As discussed above, the semicolon is also a symbol of the mental health movement called the Semicolon Project. Citing an explanation on the New Jersey website , the Semicolon Project is a movement dedicated to bringing hope to those who are struggling with mental health problems, such as suicidal ideation, self-harm, and addiction.

    The semicolon movement is performed by drawing a semicolon symbol tattoo somewhere visible on the body. Wrists, ankles, and behind the ears are some of the places that are often chosen for the placement of these tattoos. The semicolon movement has the following specific motto:

    A semicolon is used when a writer could have chosen to end their sentence, but they chose not to. The author is you yourself and the sentence is your life “.

    The reason the organization concerned chose the “semicolon” ​​symbol is because it is used when the writer seems to choose to end a sentence, but it doesn’t. Supposing, the author is yourself and the sentence is your life. Similarly, the meaning of this “semicolon” ​​tattoo. He becomes a physical representation of a person’s strength in his inner struggle.

    Even though this organization is based on Christianity, Project Semicolon does not exclude certain religions. Its founder, Amy Bleuel, allows members of other faiths to join the movement. Amy herself gave birth to this tattoo movement as a tribute to her father who died by suicide when he was 18 years old. This incident was really painful for Amy and her family. Inevitably it made him want to provide support and guidance to others dealing with the same problem.

    In a blog post, Bleuel said that his father’s death “hurt him more in his life than anything he has ever experienced”. Given her own struggles, her father’s, and the immense pain of being a family member who took her own life, Amy began to provide support and guidance to others dealing with the same issues.

    Initially, this tattoo was placed on the wrist, but now it can be embedded in any part of the body because this symbol has become a sign to represent the struggle for mental illness. Unfortunately, Ammy Bleuel died in 2017 by suicide. Therefore, his project regarding the semicolon since 2013 is still remembered and carried out today.

    This is where this project evolved from just scratching markers on the hands and then becoming permanent tattoos. So, it is clear that the connection between the semicolon and mental health is indeed close because the semicolon is a symbol of impaired mental health .

    Through its official website, Project Semicolon stated that this sign carved in the form of a tattoo reminds them to be able to control themselves to continue to consider their lives when the desire to hurt or commit suicide arises in their minds.

    Project Semicolon raises funds to help fight stigma and provide hope and love to those in need. Dusk Till Dawn Ink, a tattoo shop in Calgary, even donated a portion of the proceeds of the semicolon tattoo to the Canadian Mental Health Association.

    Now, nine years after the Project Semicolon movement officially started, “semicolon” ​​tattoos have spread to various places. Call it like a girl named Heather Parrie who felt helped by this movement. He wrote on his blog that he too was battling depression and anxiety. These two things made him have to leave the job he loved because it really hindered his work.

    Semicolon As Self Healing

    Some time ago, netizens highlighted a semicolon tattoo on one of the body parts of the capital’s artist, namely Ariel Tattum, who had made a post on his personal Instagram. “ Hello. How’s everyone doing ?” (Hello, what are you doing?),” wrote Ariel in a photo caption uploaded on Friday (27/3/2020). Launching Solo Tribune entitled “Ariel Tatum Has a ‘Semicolon’ Tattoo on the Wrist, This is the Important Meaning Behind it”.

    Through these tattoos, they express solidarity and remind themselves of the positive changes they have made throughout their lives. One of those who took part in this movement was Alex Bieger, a former drug addict. Explaining his decision to get the semicolon tattoo inked, Bieger said, “This is the first time trying to end his life.”

    It is necessary that our youth have a good understanding of what they are experiencing so that they can help themselves when dealing with the chaos they are experiencing well and not injure themselves.

    In the view of religion self-mutilation is an act that is unlawful. The majority of scholars are of the opinion that the law of self-mutilation is unlawful. This is because acts of self-injury include abuse, which can cause harm without any benefit. People who hurt themselves with the above motives, causing self-injury , will think “rather than causing trouble to other people, it is better for him to take it out on himself”.

    In its development, many of our youth are trapped in personal problems either with parents, peers or with the environment around them. The phenomenon of troubled youth should at least get attention from all of us, so that what happened to Amy Bleuel doesn’t happen to them.

    Their problems often develop into fireballs among their peers. We need to know that adolescence is a transitional period, namely a period that requires support from the people around it, especially from their families. Periods known as unrealistic times are often trapping and difficult to get back up because of the lack of treatment and assistance needed.

    The important role of parents in helping them is key in solving the problems they are experiencing. However, sometimes many parents pay less attention to the psychological development of their children when facing problems.

    In the end, they are easily exposed to depression, attempted suicide, addiction and self-harm. Good and intensive communication can at least be a therapy for them in overcoming the pressure they face so that it doesn’t get worse and becomes difficult to control again.

    It could also be a self-healing method to help those who are depressed with their psychological condition. Self Healing can be interpreted as a process of healing self-wounds from inner or mental wounds caused by various things. The inner wound itself can appear in the form of feelings of deep sadness, feelings of failure, and anxiety that lead to depression.

    Quoted from the Psychology Today page, self-healing is an effort made by oneself to heal oneself, even a study says that everyone is actually able to heal themselves with a percentage of success reaching 18-75 percent.

    The goal of self-healing is of course to be able to understand yourself, accept imperfections, and form positive thoughts about what is happening in life. Because, it is self-belief that drives them to healing.

    A simple form to ease the problem, easy to practice and doesn’t cost a lot of effort just to take the time to just pamper yourself with fun activities. One small effort to save future generations so they can be mentally healthier is our shared responsibility.

    In the future they will be the next generation who must be mentally prepared to face all changes and pressures. The foundation of the family in fostering mental health is absolutely necessary. If not, there is a serious threat to their growth and development, especially their psychological development.

    Wow, so goosebumps, guys! Mental health is indeed an issue that is not playing games. Considering that our country is not yet fully open to mental health problems. Now let’s start from ourselves, don’t wait for the people around us or even ourselves to be trapped by negative thoughts that can lead us down.

    Mental health is indeed very important and cannot be underestimated. If a simple symbol can give a person hope in life, how about the support of loved ones? Don’t forget to pay attention to your mental health and those of your loved ones, OK?

    It can be concluded that the semicolon and mental health are interrelated. So , if we meet someone who uses this symbol, it could be a sign of their mental health. If those with these signs are the closest people, don’t hesitate to provide support for them and care more about their mental health.

    Book Recommendations & Related Articles

  • What is a Rob Flood: Meaning, Causes, Characteristics, and Handling

    Rob floods are – Rob floods, also known as tidal floods in English, are temporary flooding in low-lying areas near the coast. Areas that are at risk may experience these floods several times a year.

    Even though tidal floods may not be known by many people, everyone needs to understand the meaning of tidal floods, the factors that cause them, and how to deal with them by the community.

    By knowing how to deal with it, we will recognize the signs, and take the right steps to handle it. In fact, don’t hesitate to ask for help and contact the authorities if you have trouble dealing with tidal floods yourself.

    To find out more about tidal flooding, you can watch this article until it’s finished, Sinaumed’s.

    Definition of Rob Flood

    Tidal floods are inundation of land in coastal areas during very high tides or storm surges. Meanwhile, this flood generally occurs temporarily and usually occurs in a short time only during high tide. However, these floods can also cause significant impacts on low-lying coastal areas very quickly.

    These floods usually come from a combination of winds, offshore storms, to full moon cycles during high tides, such as new moon and full moon. If Sinaumed’s finds that the roads around him are flooded even on a sunny day, it is very likely that it is a tidal flood because it is not affected by the weather except those that affect the water level.

    In more detail, this type of flooding is more common in cities to human-occupied coastal areas. This is because sea levels are getting higher due to climate change and environmental impacts that can be closely related to humans, such as coastal erosion or land subsidence due to a lot of infrastructure.

    Tidal floods can develop into coastal flooding which needs to be managed and adapted to more extensive climate change, so that flooding can be dealt with by utilizing regional management. Therefore, the practice of handling and preventing tidal floods is very necessary for vulnerable areas.

    Rob Flood Characteristics

    The water contained in tidal floods generally looks clearer than flash floods or river overflow floods. This is the main feature as well as what distinguishes tidal floods from other floods. Not only that, this type of flood also has special characteristics when it occurs, the color of the water, the season, and the condition of the land that is inundated.

    Tidal floods themselves are often associated with poor regional governance or natural factors which can be considered difficult to predict.

    Factors Causing Flood Rob

    The chance of tidal flooding can increase because it is influenced by several factors. Here are some of the factors that trigger tidal floods.

    1. High Temperature or Global Warming

    Higher temperatures mean the oceans can also get warmer. From 1950, the Risk Factor said that sea surface temperatures rose by about 1.5˚F and will be warmer by about 0.5˚F again in 2050.

    Higher sea surface temperatures can trigger offshore storms with more water and more power. So, tidal floods may occur far inland or far from the coast, be more intense, and last longer than usual.

    2. Land Level Dropped

    There are also other causes of tidal flooding, namely land subsidence. For information, this phenomenon occurs as a natural event caused by loading.

    So, when an area with rock mass at the top has a higher density than the bottom rock mass, subsidence can occur there.

    3. Sea Level Height

    For example, on most of the American coast, sea level rise is caused by global melting of ice, changes in ocean circulation, thermal expansion, and local sinking or subsidence of land masses. This rise in sea level creates higher tides and puts pressure on the coastal drainage system.

    Sea level height can affect tidal flooding. This is because storm surges are higher due to hurricanes and other storms. This is what results in a flood that is deeper, more far-reaching, and lasts longer.

    4. Intense Abrasion

    Do you know, Sinaumed’s, what is abrasion? Abrasion is erosion in coastal areas due to high sea waves. This is a natural process that causes the land area at the water’s edge to decrease. Therefore, areas with low elevations will be more susceptible to tidal flooding.

    5. Rainfall is quite high

    High rainfall can affect sea level rise which exacerbates the risk of tidal flooding and storms. When sea levels rise, a lot of water can contribute to forming storm surges. This means that water can flow further into areas that are less risky or stagnate deeper in settlements.

    Higher sea level rise pressure can push seawater into drainage pipes and “spill” water onto roads, during high tide events. This will cause tidal flooding even on a sunny day.

    Due to rising sea levels, homes that were previously safe from tidal flooding, experiencing the highest annual flooding, or even storm surges, may be more at risk in the near future.

    6. Drainage Damage

    Still related to the previous factor, sea water will inundate the land at the edge of the waters during high tide conditions. This is due to the reduced available accommodation space. Thus, sea water will enter the canals and cause the overflow of the rivers in the vicinity.

    When an overflow occurs, the water should flow into the drainage and through it to return to the sea. However, it will be difficult for water to flow if the drainage is damaged. If that happens, the area will be inundated by tidal floods for quite a long time.

    Examples of Rob Flood Cases

    It’s not complete if we already know about tidal floods, but don’t see real examples of how to clean up and prepare ourselves. Therefore, the following are examples of cases of tidal flooding, both at home and abroad.

    In Indonesia

    Entering the third week of August 2022, tidal floods are predicted to threaten the area around East Java waters from August 16 to August 18. This is due to the high waves and wind patterns in the northern part of Indonesia, which predominantly move from southeast to southwest. The speed reaches 5-20 knots. Meanwhile, the wind in the south moves from east to southeast at a speed of around 5-20 knots.

    On the other hand, on August 15, a tidal flood occurred in Semarang, in Kampung Tambak Lorok, Tanjung Emas to be precise. According to local residents, this disaster had even occurred since the previous week. The flood water usually comes to settlements every morning until evening and sometimes comes at night.

    The water level is estimated at approximately 1 meter in the settlement. As a result of this incident, many residents’ needs could not be met. In fact, school children are constrained and residents cannot use their vehicles for fear of damage.

    Abroad

    In 2005, Hurricane Katrina or Hurricane Katrina hit. The 27.8-foot storm surge collapsed the New Orleans levees and caused massive flooding. The storm ultimately claimed nearly 2000 lives, 1833 lives to be exact. Meanwhile, Hurricane Katrina caused more than $105 billion in damage.

    Scientists estimate that storm surge and floods were 15-60 percent higher than in 1900, when local sea levels were 2.4 feet lower. The First Street Foundation also found that rising sea levels since the 1970s contributed to an estimated 57,000 more homes being affected by storm surge during Hurricane Irma.

    When Hurricane Harvey hit Houston in 2017, the Gulf of Mexico experienced record-breaking sea temperatures, reaching over 86˚F. Warm waters sustained and intensified more severe storms, plus enough humidity to produce up to 60.58 inches of rain in some areas, and lasted 4 days. this made Hurricane Harvey the largest tropical cyclone ever recorded in the country.

    Types of Floods

    Flood refers to high flow, overflow, or stagnation of water that causes or threatens damage to property or life. However, basically, the flood itself consists of several types, namely storm floods, rainfall floods, flash floods, and river floods. For more details, you can see the explanation below.

    1. Storm Flood

    The storm creates a storm surge, a combination of wind and low pressure at the center of the storm, which pulls in the water and carries it inland. The more severe a storm, the bigger the storm surge and the farther water can travel inland. These floods are often exacerbated by rainfall that occurs along with thunderstorms.

    Did you know that in the United States, floods kill more people each year than tornadoes, hurricanes or lightning? Floods can be very dangerous if we don’t know how to handle them, Sinaumed’s.

    2. Rainfall Flood

    High intensity rainfall causes flooding when the sewage system and drainage channels in an area do not have the capacity needed to carry away the amount of rain that falls.

    Urban areas are especially vulnerable to this type of flooding because there is little open land to store water. In rural areas where there is more land, these floods often occur in valleys and other low-lying areas.

    3. Flash Floods

    Flash floods occur when there is a rapid and extreme flow of high water into an area that is normally dry, or a rapid rise in the water level of a river or creek. Sustained flooding can escalate and become flash floods. What’s more, if the rainfall is high and for a long time it causes the flood water waves to rise quickly.

    4. River Flood

    These floods are overflow floods from rivers and flows occur when there is an increase in the volume of water in the river channel, causing it to spill over and flood the adjacent land. Dams and levees that are not functioning properly can also cause river flooding. The cause of the dam was damaged because the water has exceeded its capacity.

    What to Do Before, During and After a Flood?

    After learning about tidal floods and other types of floods, it is important for us to know what to do before, during and after a flood occurs. What are these things? Here’s an explanation.

    Before the Flood

    Things to do before a flood occurs, including:

    1. Understand the potential flood risk of our own area. Check the flood risk in the area and in your own home by looking up the zip code.
    2. Make sure we can receive a flood warning service to receive free flood alerts related to tidal and/or major river flooding.
    3. Make sure we have safe and appropriate insurance to protect the building and its contents from damage due to flooding.
    4. Stay up to date with weather reports and warnings issued by local authorities.
    5. Know the flood warnings in our area.
    6. Know how to turn off the gas, electricity and water supply in your home.
    7. Prepare a flood plan personally, as a family, or as a group.
    8. Prepare a flood pack.
    9. Clean gutters and drains of debris regularly if it is safe to do so.
    10. Report any blocked sewers to the authorities.
    11. Prepare our homes with anti-flood equipment, for example through flood boards, airbrick covers or using more effective sandbags.

    During the Flood

    During a flood, we can call 112. However, there are also several other steps that can be taken during a flood, including:

    1. Avoid walking or driving through or near flood waters.
    2. Do not touch a power source while standing in water.
    3. Avoid contact with flood water and wash hands regularly.
    4. Gather a flood kit and make sure it’s always around us.
    5. Evacuate property if safe to do so. If it’s not safe, call emergency services and wait for further instructions.
    6. Help those around us who may be less able, such as the elderly or the disabled, but only when it is safe to do so. If not, notify emergency services in this regard.
    7. Stay informed. Listen to radio and TV, check social media.

    After the Flood

    1. In the event of a breakdown, contact the insurance company to advise them of the current situation and follow their advice on what to do next. Also make sure you take photos of damaged items before throwing them away.
    2. If you decide to return home, make sure it is completely safe and stable inside before entering.
    3. Do not turn on the gas or electricity if there is a possibility that it may still get wet. Only turn it on when it has been checked by a qualified technician.
    4. Do not eat food that has been in contact with flood waters.
    5. Do not eat food fresh from the fridge or freezer if the power has been off for more than four hours.
    6. Wash your hands frequently with clean water and soap. If you don’t have clean water, use wet wipes or hand sanitizer gel.
    7. Call 119 if you have a non-urgent health problem.
    8. Reach out to friends and family for support and help.
    9. Make sure there is good ventilation if Sinaumed’s uses portable indoor heating equipment inside. Do not use gasoline or diesel generators, or other similar fueled equipment indoors.
    10. Stay with friends or family, or ask local authorities or insurance companies to help you find alternative accommodation if your home is already damaged by flooding.
    11. Throw away used sandbags used for treatment or contact the environmental health department for disposal of sandbags and other things that are contaminated with chemicals or waste.

    Sinaumed’s, that’s a complete explanation regarding tidal flooding, starting from the meaning, characteristics, causal factors, to examples of old and new cases, outside or within the country. Thus, it is hoped that public knowledge regarding the tidal flood disaster will continue to increase.

    Don’t forget, apart from tidal flooding, you can also add other knowledge about natural disasters by reading books available at sinaumedia.com . sinaumedia always provides the best products and promos so you have #MoreWithReading information.

  • What is a Research Paradigm and Its Types and Terminology

    The word research is certainly very familiar to students. Because, throughout their study period, students often come into direct contact with research or matters related to research. Many courses use research as the basis of learning. Whether it’s as a literature study, assignment, or self-conducted research such as doing a final assignment or a thesis. In this article, we will discuss more about the research paradigm.

    Definition of Research

    Research is a scientific method in order to be able to master and obtain a solution to a problem that aims to get the truth that has the character of scientific validity. There are many truths that can be proven by the scientific method, generally any truths that are metaphysical or aesthetic in nature. For example, is the truth of religion or subjective beauty. The scientific truth is a truth based on senses and rational power. So that the scientific truth is quite limited and not the truth of the essence. So, the scientific truth has a tentative or not fixed behavior. If concluded, then the scientific truth that was once discovered is a truth that is not eternal. This is because the truth can be retested based on previous findings.

    Definition of Research Paradigm

    The research paradigm is the frame of mind used by researchers in viewing the reality of a problem as well as theory or science. According to the narrative of Guba (1990), the research paradigm is a set of beliefs and shared agreements between one scientist and another about how a problem should be handled and also understood.

    In general, there are two groups of paradigms that are often used by researchers. Where the paradigms that are often used by researchers are the quantitative and qualitative paradigms. Both paradigms have their own criteria and methods. Whether it’s a quantitative or qualitative research paradigm. Both have their own characteristics and advantages and disadvantages.

    Apart from these two paradigms, there are also other underlying research paradigms. Some of these paradigms include the positivism paradigm, the constructivism paradigm, the pragmatism paradigm, the critical paradigm, and also the subjectivism paradigm.

    – Constructivism : The meaning is to believe that there is no single truth or reality. This reality must be interpreted and each interpretation must be different. The approach in this paradigm uses a qualitative approach.
    – Positivism : Believing that there is a single truth of an event or view. The reality that exists in positivism can be measured by valid and reliable methods. The approach used in this paradigm is a quantitative approach.
    – Pragmatic: That means believing that reality or existing reality can be debated and interpreted. Therefore, the best way that can be used in research is to find solutions to every problem that comes up. The approach to the pragmatic paradigm is a combination of quantitative and qualitative.
    – Subjectivism : believing that reality is what researchers believe to be a real reality. So that subjectivists argue that knowledge is a matter of perspective. Where the subjectivist paradigm uses archaeological, deconstructive approaches, as well as discourse analysis.
    – Critical: Believing that reality is a form that is constructed so that it is always under an ongoing power relationship. The paradigm generally uses ideological criticism, ethnography, criticism, and discourse analysis.

    In addition, the paradigm also has several philosophical terminologies, namely epistemology, ontological, methodological, and also axiological.

    a. Epistemology : means how something can be known.
    b. Ontology : means what you want to know, generally related to existing reality.
    c. Axiology : means explaining the value of research.
    d. Methodology : means how scientists find out.

    Why Is It Important?

    The existence of epistemology and also ontology in a problem can be seen holistically or as a whole regarding how knowledge is viewed and how we researchers can see ourselves in relation to knowledge and also the methodological strategies that will be used to reveal it. With an awareness of philosophical assumptions, researchers will be able to improve the quality of research and can contribute to the development of a study.

    Types of Research Paradigm

    To make it easier for us to understand the research paradigm when we are about to compile a scientific paper that we will be working on, it would be better if we understood the types of research paradigms. Here is the full explanation:

    1. Quantitative Research Paradigm

    The quantitative paradigm is a paradigm based on the philosophy of positivism, which does not recognize the elements of theology or metaphysics. This paradigm believes that science is the only valid knowledge. The knowledge in question is knowledge gained from experience that we have gone through. Where we feel the experience by our senses which will be processed by our own minds.

    Because it starts from personal experience, the object of research is usually not far from the relationship and cause and effect between the experiences we have gone through and the phenomena that exist. Even though it comes from our experience, research is still based on existing facts. In addition, research can also be based on assumptions by looking at the facts. Thus, this paradigm uses our assumptions that we have built from facts that we get from our thought processes regarding certain phenomena or events.

    In addition, the quantitative paradigm also has the view that one of the sources of knowledge is rational thinking on empirical data. This thinking is based on compatibility with previous theories which are generally referred to as coherence. Where in the process, starting from assumptions or what we usually refer to as the formulation of hypotheses. To then be verified in order to get a new theory. In looking at an event, the quantitative paradigm holds that the variables in it may change depending on the conditions and situation. Therefore, in quantitative research only use certain variables. Where the variables used are generally only those related to the purpose of the research to be carried out.

    2. Qualitative Research Paradigm

    The qualitative research paradigm is research that places humans as research subjects. This paradigm includes adhering to a humanistic model because it makes humans the subject of research in the phenomena or events that we will study. In addition, the qualitative paradigm believes that humans will determine their own behavior and social events that occur. Edmund Husserl’s phenomenological philosophy which was later developed in sociology by Max Weber became the basis of this paradigm.

    This view considers that human behavior is based on the thoughts or doctrines possessed by that individual. So when we use a qualitative paradigm, an event is not only viewed singly. But many elements, aspects, and other things that make up this behavior. In essence, we can call it any reason that moves humans to act. Whether this is realized or not realized by the individual.

    In essence, this paradigm believes that humans have control over their behavior choices. In addition to emphasizing the individual, the qualitative paradigm also assesses that phenomena or events must be seen as a whole. It is not enough just to look at this phenomenon without looking at the reasons or causes of the events that occurred. When we want to see events that occur along with the causes of their occurrence, the qualitative paradigm can be the right choice for you to use.

    Unlike the quantitative research paradigm, the qualitative research paradigm is not limited to testing hypotheses using previous theories. But you have to find a new theory that exists systematically. So, this paradigm still recognizes empirical facts as a source of knowledge. However, it is not used to verify. Because, in a study with this paradigm trying to explore the factors behind the phenomenon, therefore the research process is considered more important than the research results obtained.

    That is an explanation of what a research paradigm is and the types of paradigms, ranging from quantitative to qualitative research paradigms. Hope it is useful!

  • What is a Manufacturing Company? These are Characteristics, Systems and Business Processes

    Manufacturing company is a form of company whose activities are to sell various raw materials or raw materials, as well as semi-finished products. The purpose of selling producers from manufacturing companies is to provide raw materials to be processed into products to meet market demand. The more demand in the market, the more production processes carried out by producers.

    In general, manufacturing companies also produce products according to market demand. Therefore, the manufacturing process involves a variety of factors, including: Human resources, natural resources, machine tools. Currently, a manufacturing company is a form of company that plays a large role in an increasingly sophisticated technological era.

    Manufacturing and sales companies are classified as trading companies because they function as sellers of goods and as business activities. For unique management purposes, production and sales are usually done in factories, making it more centralized. To know more about manufacturing companies, Sinaumed’s can see the following explanation:

    Definition of Manufacturing Company

    This company has many business activities. The more activities that are carried out, the more problems will occur. The problem that can occur is in the very limited elements of the organizational system. Therefore, someone performs two or more activities, records errors in purchasing and receiving raw materials, and records them in the inventory area.

    Therefore, it is very important to record and measure manufacturing costs using accounting methods. Company problems need to be prevented or minimized by managing the company’s operations properly. From a technical point of view, the word manufacturing itself is an activity of processing raw materials through chemical and physical processes with the aim of changing the type, shape and appearance of the product. Production activities involve compounding processes from several components to form the whole product.

    The definition of a manufacturing company from an economic point of view is the process of converting raw materials into a form of added value through one or more assembly processes. The expected end result is the creation of a product that is worth selling. Production itself consists of several labor steps, each labor step bringing the raw material closer to its final form. Then what is meant by a factory is a business unit that switches from raw materials to semi-finished products or finished products with a certain selling value.

    The cultivation of manufacturing companies is managing equipment, machines and workers in one medium. All processes and stages carried out in this manufacturing activity lead to standard operating procedures or commonly called SOPs belonging to each work unit. In Indonesia alone, manufacturing companies are commonly referred to as factories.

    In English, factory means factory and refers to a place or a description of a place. This factory or factory is used as an indicator of the location used in the process of making its product. Indonesia has several areas designated as industrial areas such as Cibitung and Cikarang. However, there may be industrial land in other parts of Indonesia.

    Manufacturing Company Character

    1. Manufacturing process 

    The first characteristic of a manufacturing company is the manufacturing process. In other words, companies that involve processing raw materials into final materials can be referred to as manufacturing companies. In addition, producers must also have products to sell. Because it is a place where business profits or gains are achieved. Of course this character is not called a manufacturing company if there is no manufacturing process.

    2. Inventory type 

    The second character is the storage type or inventory form. According to experts, there are three types of supplies for manufacturers: raw materials, semi-finished products and finished products. This symbol distinguishes between a manufacturing company and a trading company. This is because the trading company is only responsible for marketing the product and does not act as a supplier of materials for the manufacture of the product. From this point of view, a company can certainly be described as a producer if it includes the materials and the product itself to make that product.

    3. Production costs 

    The third sign is production costs, which means that if production costs are incurred, then the company is called a manufacturing company. The entire process of assembling raw materials into finished products is certainly associated with costs. About the cost of purchasing material processing machines, etc. Now, these costs are called production costs.

    Manufacturing Company System

    1. Implementation of a pull system 

    The pull system strategy means that items are only collected when needed. This needs to be done because it is intended to be more flexible, to be able to respond more quickly to customer needs, and to avoid waste.

    2. Focus on quality 

    We need to focus on maintaining quality so that the products we produce have the best quality. In this process, quality is determined in the manufacturing process. Therefore, the most important key to ensure the quality of a product is the manufacturing process. There are several methods that can be applied or used to maintain production quality, such as the Six Sigma method and the basic concept of quality, namely the production of goods and services that are free of defects.

    3. Planning and implementation 

    Planning is an important strategy that we cannot ignore. The goal is to minimize the possibility of waste generation and “defective” or damaged production, and enable companies to perform all tasks in the process clearly and smoothly.

    4. Ability to make decisions 

    The decision-making strategy is one of the most important points to be able to improve producer performance. In this system, fast and accurate decision making is one of the most effective choices needed in the production process.

    5. Good cooperation with suppliers 

    Collaboration is the most influential because it can influence suppliers or companies that use lean manufacturing methods, commonly referred to as suppliers.

    For the growth of a manufacturing company, various supports from suppliers, such as providing high-quality and perfect materials and on-time delivery, are essential. Therefore, suppliers or suppliers must be an important part of a  lean manufacturing company . This will enable companies to train not only their employees but also their suppliers.

     

    Manufacturing Company Business Process

    1. Procurement process 

    The procurement process is a process in which the business activities of a manufacturing company are related to the procurement of goods. Therefore, this process is always needed to support the continuity of the company.

    2. Stock in/out stock 

    The second store process has an inventory in/out process. The point is the business process of manufacturing companies in the form of processing raw materials into final products.

    3. Manufacturing process 

    The manufacturing process is a process related to the sale or marketing of company products. Of course the purpose of this manufacturing process is to get a large profit from the product produced.

    4. Accounting and Treasury 

    The next process for the producer is its accounting and financial system. This business process aims to keep the company’s finances healthy and running smoothly.

    5. General Affairs 

    Manufacturing company business processes are general management, including elements such as policies, records, decisions, controls, and penalties. However, in the accounting process itself, manufacturers are generally different from other manufacturers. For the manufacturing facility itself, there is a process for managing raw materials and calculating production and overhead costs . Of course, for manufacturers, manual bookkeeping is very time consuming and not the right choice.

    How To Make A Manufacturing Company Grow And Run Smoothly

    1. Productivity 

    When a product is low in stock, production costs, or even higher capital requirements, it is necessary to rethink the market strategy to follow before launching a manufacturing company. Profits obtained must also be maximized.

    2. Quality control 

    A company cannot survive unless its products and products are made with high quality. Especially if there are already many companies that can produce products at lower prices and maintain product quality. It is developed by many companies in China.

    3. Use the best Design 

    Manufacturing companies need to compete with their competitors. The best design is an absolute advantage when it comes to products, enabling companies to assert themselves against their competitors. For example, Apple makes a white speakerphone, but the cables are surprisingly annoying. Therefore, White’s hands-free kit was able to dominate the global market, and Apple made a huge profit by having the courage to bring a design concept that was different from other competitors to the market.

    4. Excellent financial management 

    Manufacturing company finance is one of the most important factors that influence the success of a company. Companies need to think about how to manage capital, income and production costs for maximum profit. In manufacturing financial accounting, there are bound to be minor differences between commercial and service companies. This is because it includes a production cost report. Manufacturing Cost (HPP) is the main financial statement of the manufacturer.

    Example of a manufacturing company

    1. Food 

    The food industry converts livestock and agricultural products into products for intermediate or final consumption. Industrial groups are distinguished based on the raw materials processed into food (usually obtained from animals and vegetables). Food produced in this business is usually sold to wholesalers or retailers for distribution to consumers.

    2. Textiles 

    This company is one of many industries operating in Indonesia. For example, this industry processes cotton into yarn and cloth, so that later these fabrics can be made into apparel. It is not uncommon for many people to work in the textile industry, because this industry can absorb a large workforce.

    3. Chemicals 

    The chemical industry is very important in this modern era because chemistry is needed for various economic activities. The chemical industry is divided into three main categories, such as heavy chemicals (using deposits or by-products), pharmaceuticals, and petrochemicals (chemicals obtained from fuel sources).

    4. Cars 

    The automotive industry is an industry that deals with the use of advanced technology in the manufacturing process. Many industrial products have been produced. Examples of car industry products include bicycles, motorcycles and cars.

    5. Electronic equipment 

    This is similar to the automotive industry, where electronics manufacturers use advanced technology to manufacture their products. This achievement of the electronics industry is one of the industries that Sinaumed’s uses most often in everyday life. Examples of this electronic industry are television, computers, fans, air conditioners, dispensers, electric stoves, and many other electronic products.

    6. Crafts 

    The craft industry is one type of industry that is widely used in Indonesian manufacturing. In most cases, if Sinaumed’s wants to set up a small business, you shouldn’t underestimate this example of a manufacturing company. The value of foreign exchange generated by this branch to promote Indonesia’s world economy has also become very high. Most of this production is directed to foreign consumption or export. To handle this kind of industrial production, it is usually made from various materials, especially used and environmentally friendly materials which make it a new product that has more visual value.

    The Development of the Manufacturing Industry in Indonesia

    The government wants to continue to change and coordinate its economy so that it is more focused on developing non-oil and gas companies. As quoted from the Investment Coordinating Commission website, abbreviated as BKPM, the manufacturing industry is more productive, can achieve various effects, add value to raw materials, and increase the number of workers. As the largest contributor of taxes and obligations.

    The Ministry of Industry found that production in many sectors exceeded the country’s GDP, with textiles and clothing at 7.53 percent, basic metals at 9.94 percent, and transportation equipment at 6.33 percent. This is because the number of buyers increases over time, and the number of production processes increases according to demand. Various Indonesian manufacturing industries are also being developed in other ASEAN countries such as Vietnam and the Philippines.

    This will encourage economic growth to be more competitive at the national, regional and global levels. Another difference that the Indonesian economy already has is its strength in the domestic market with an increase of 80 percent. The rest is for the export market, unlike Singapore and Vietnam which still have a dominant economic system that is geared towards export activities.

    So, that’s an explanation about manufacturing companies that Sinaumed’s needs to know before moving into this field. Based on its development, manufacturing companies are one of the segments that have good prospects, so Sinaumed’s can start to follow suit. If Sinaumed’s needs lots of references about manufacturing companies, then you can visit sinaumedia’s book collection at www.sinaumedia.com , such as the following book recommendations: Enjoy studying. #Friends Without Limits.

    • The Purpose of Forming Cooperatives in Indonesia
    • Definition of Distribution: Types, Channels, Objectives, Functions, Factors of Influence, and Strategy
    • 6 Goals of OPEC Formation: History, Background, Role of Indonesia
    • Definition of Economic Development: Objectives, Indicators, and Stages
    • Purpose of Formation WTO, World Trade Organization

    Manufacturing Product Design & Development

  • What is a Government System? Here’s the explanation

    Definition of Government System – The system of government is the basis of the state. It can be said that the system of government will determine how a country runs. This is what makes the system of government so important.

    Each country certainly has its own system of government. Through the government system, the country can run according to what has been determined. The system of government is not directly determined.

    There are factors that influence the system of government in a country. One of them is the state of Indonesia, which is a unitary and republican state. However, before knowing that, we need to know the meaning of the government system.

    What is a government system? This article will discuss the meaning of the government system and government system adopted by Indonesia.

    Definition of Government System

    The word system comes from the word “system”. The word is a word from English. Has the meaning of arrangement, way, network, order or method.

    In KBBI (Big Indonesian Dictionary) the system has three meanings. First, a set of elements that are regularly interrelated, thus forming a totality. An example of this understanding is the political system.

    Second, the system is an orderly arrangement of views, theories or principles. An example of this understanding is a system of government such as totalitarianism, democracy. The parliamentary system of government is also included in this definition.

    Third, the system is a method. Examples in this sense are ways of doing something. Like the system in rice cultivation.

    The origin of the word government is government. While the word government also comes from other words. The word government comes from the word command.

    In KBBI, these words have several meanings. First, command words are words that have the meaning of ordering to do something. Second, the word government has the meaning of power that governs a region, region or even a country.

    The meaning of kara government is an act, thing, way, or affairs in ordering something. Government also means all the affairs carried out by the state, these affairs are carried out to organize the welfare of the people as well as the interests of the state. Therefore, governance is an act or activity of government.

    This action was taken to organize the creation and enforcement of laws. The point is to create community welfare. Selqin, to carry out the interests of the state.

    Based on the two meanings of the word, it can now be concluded about the meaning of the government system. The system of government is an orderly arrangement. The composition is in the form of principles that underlie various activities.

    In addition, this principle also underlies the working relationship. Such as between the legislature, the executive branch, and the judiciary. These institutions will run the administration of government in a country.

    The government system is the relationship and arrangement between state institutions. The state institutions are intertwined. In addition, the institution is also continuous in one unit within the framework of administering the state.

    There are several systems of government within a country. Such as presidential, semi-presidential, parliamentary, monarchy, liberal, democratic, federal, tyrannical and aristocratic government systems.

    The people who run the government system are the government. Government is a combination of a group of people. Government is a number of institutions within the state. The government’s job is to make and enforce laws in a country.

    There are several other meanings of the government system. This understanding is conveyed by experts and people who are proficient in their fields, including the following:

    1. Moh Mahfud MD

    The government system according to Mahfud MD is a mechanism of work. The system of government is coordination or a relationship. The coordination occurs among the three branches of power. The branches of power include the legislature, executive and judiciary.

    2. Aristotle

    Aristotle divided the form of government based on the number of people who rule. In addition, Aristotle also divides based on the nature of his government. Aristotle’s division is divided into 6.

    These divisions include tyranny, monarchy, oligarchy, aristocracy, democracy and republic or politea.

    3. Polybius

    Polybius also divided the forms of government. This division is based on the number of people. In addition, the distribution is also done based on the nature of how the government.

    Based on Polybius’ point of view, the government system can be divided into six types of government. There is monarchy, oligarchy, tyranny, aristocracy, anarchy or ochloration and democracy.

    4. Kranenburg

    Kranenburg also said something about the system of government. According to him, there is uncertainty between users of the terms monarchy and republic. The uncertainty refers to the form of government or the form of the state.

    5. Leon Duguit

    The government system according to Duguit is also divided into several parts. This division is based on how to appoint the head of state. In a republic system, the head of state is appointed through elections. Whereas in a monarchy system, the head of state will be appointed from generation to generation or through a family tree.

    6. Jellinec

    The system of government according to Jlinec is also divided into two. There is a monarchical system of government and a republican system of government. The opinion expressed by Jellinec is also in line with what was stated by Leon Duguit.

    7. Constitutional Law

    According to constitutional law, there are 3 definitions of a government system, namely:

    a. In a narrow sense

    Government system in the narrow sense is a study that sees two relationships. This relationship occurs between the legislature and the executive branch. What are the two institutions in a country.

    Based on this study, two government systems were produced. First, the parliamentary system of government. Second, the presidential system of government.

    b. In a broad sense

    System of government in a broad sense is a study of state government. The study departs from the relationship between all state organs. Including the relationship between the central government and the existing parts of the country.

    Starting from this view, the state government system is divided into three. First, the unitary state system. Second, the state or federal state system. Third, the confederation of state systems.

    c. In a very broad sense

    In a very broad sense, the system of government is a study that emphasizes two relationships. The relationship between the state and its people. Based on this study, the government system is divided into three types.

    First, the monarchical system of government. Second, the aristocratic system of government. Third, the system of democratic government.

    8.David Apter

    The government system is a member who has roles and responsibilities. Members are able to maintain all cultures. Covers matters concerning the state and its government.

    This opinion conveyed by David Apter emphasizes that the system of government certainly has a practical monopoly. The practical monopoly in question is regarding forced power.

    9. Sayre

    The system of government according to Sayre is an organization at levels in a country. Within the organization there is dedication to the task. In addition, there are also different roles from one to another.

    This will eventually create a pattern. The pattern in question is the pattern of linkages. Apart from that, they will keep an eye on each other.

    10. Rosenal

    According to Rosenal, the system of government has a definition as a science. The knowledge is given the task and authority as a study. Regarding the ways of administering the state

    This happens either externally or internally. This causes it to have a different structure. These different structures are viewed from a global perspective.

    11. Haryanto

    The system of government is about the division of tasks. The division of tasks is carried out functionally. This is done in state organizations.

    Of course, state organizations have different functions and authorities. However, the organization remains connected. Among one another.

    How is the Government System in Indonesia?

    While the government in Indonesia is a republic. In addition to the form of a unitary state and a republican government, the holder of power as the head of state in Indonesia is the President. The president also holds the head of government in Indonesia.

    This is based on Article 4 Paragraph 1. It reads “The President of the Republic of Indonesia holds government power according to the Constitution”. Therefore, the government system in Indonesia adheres to a presidential system of government.

    The presidential government system is a government system that places the President as the head of government. The president has no responsibility to parliament or the legislature. Meanwhile, ministers will report directly to the president.

    That’s because the President has a very high position. In a presidential system of government, the President is the head of state. In addition, the president is also the head of government.

    That is information about the meaning of the system of government. Not only that, there are still many interesting things about the government system and other things. Find other interesting information at www.sinaumedia.com. sinaumedia as #FriendsWithoutLimits will present interesting articles and recommendations for the best books for Sinaumed’s.

  • What is a Focus Group Discussion (FGD)?

    FGD Is – Have you ever heard of the term FGD when talking about a serious discussion or conversation? What do you mean? So, to find out about FGDs, you can watch this article until it’s finished, Sinaumed’s.

    Definition of FGD

    Focus Group Discussion (FGD) is a qualitative data collection method that gathers community members to discuss certain topics. The questions are open-ended in nature with the aim of stimulating informal discussion and exploring people’s views in greater detail than is possible through surveys. FGDs usually last 60-90 minutes and involve between 6 and 12 participants.

    The strengths of FGDs depend on allowing participants to agree or disagree with each other, thus providing insight into how a group thinks about an issue, regarding the range of opinions and ideas, and the inconsistencies and variations that exist within a given community in terms of beliefs and experiences and practices they.

    FGDs can be used to explore the meaning of survey findings that cannot be explained statistically, share opinions or views on topics of interest and to collect various local terms. In bridging research and policy, FGDs can be useful in providing insight into differences of opinion among various parties involved in the change process, thereby enabling the process to be managed more smoothly. This FGD is also a good method to use before designing a questionnaire.

    Definition of FGD According to Experts

    Each of the experts has its own statement that can explain the purpose of the focus group discussion . Here’s each explanation that deserves a closer look:

    1. Krueger  

    Krueger defines FGDs as well-planned discussions to obtain data from respondents. Meanwhile, this discussion was carried out in a relaxed atmosphere and was guided by a moderator who could make the atmosphere as relaxed as possible until there was an occasional ice-breaking session .

    2. Anita Gibbs    

    Focus group discussion according to Anita Gibbs is a discussion that has the main objective of utilizing the attitudes, feelings, reactions, and experiences of respondents when discussing a specific issue. Meanwhile, aspects like this will not be easily obtained through other methods such as interviews.

    3. Irwanto

    Then, Irwanto said that focus group discussions are activities to collect data related to specific problems by involving groups in a systematic discussion.

    4. Peter & Zuzanna 

    FGD according to Peter and Zuzanna refers to research methods and data collection techniques that involve certain groups of people so that specific topics can be discussed in depth.

    5. Tobias, et al 

    Finally, Tobias et al. interpret focus group discussion as a qualitative research method that is often used to discuss a social issue in depth.

    FGD goals

    These frequently used terms as tools provide guidance or have objectives for conducting effective FGDs, including organization, roles and responsibilities, and questions to help us plan, monitor and evaluate approaches to community engagement.

    Process Outline

    The FGD session needs to be carefully prepared by identifying the main objectives of the meeting, developing key questions, developing an agenda, and planning how to record the session. The next step is to identify and invite appropriate discussion participants; the ideal number is between six and eight.

    An important element of the FGD is facilitation. Some important things to keep in mind in facilitating FGDs are ensuring equal participation, careful wording of key questions, maintaining a neutral demeanor and appearance, and summarizing the session to reflect opinions evenly and fairly.

    A detailed report should be prepared after the session is over. Any observations during the session should be recorded and included in the report.

    FGDs can also be conducted online . This is especially useful for overcoming the distance barrier. While the discussion is limited, a written format can help report the discussion.

    Stages in the FGD

    After we become more familiar with the concept of FGDs, there are other things that are no less important to know, namely the steps we must take to be able to conduct the FGDs themselves well. In this case, in fact there are many things that must be prepared. Even so, there are 6 main stages that can outline it. Here are the 6 stages!

    1. Select Moderators

    Sinaumed’s, the first step in starting to focus on FGDs is to choose a moderator who can be assigned to manage the discussion so that the goals can be achieved according to plan. Meanwhile, the main criteria for an FGD moderator are as follows:

    • Professional
    • critical thinking
    • Have good analytical skills
    • Speak plainly and clearly
    • Neutral and objective
    • Be firm and stay calm
    • Good observer and listener

    2. Prepare the Team

    The next step is to form a team for a smooth discussion process. In one team, the number of people can be adjusted according to our needs. Sinaumed’s, don’t forget to share clear tasks for each member involved.

    For example, there will be members tasked with recording time or important points, dealing with technical issues, and documenting activities. If the tasks and members have been formed, all that remains is to determine the location and date of the FGD.

    3. Present the Topic and Ask Questions 

    Next, we have to divide the existing members into several groups. In one group, it can consist of 4 to 5 members for the mini discussion model, and 8 to 12 people if the discussion model is larger. If everything is in order, the moderator only needs to explain regarding the topic, rules, and time distribution.

    In focus group discussions , the types of questions are open-ended so that group members can give each other opinions.

    4. Summarize the contents of the discussion 

    The team assigned as the note taker must record every important point during the discussion. This includes the responses expressed by the participants. These members can also perform recording techniques to be more effective in providing information. The reason is, there could have been missed by the minutes, right?

    5. Data Analysis

    When the discussion is over, the data recorded by the minutes will be analyzed by another team assigned to it. Meanwhile, the things that are analyzed are:

    • Opinion of each respondent
    • Respondent’s attitude in defending his opinion
    • Discussion patterns
    • General conclusion

    The importance of the analysis relates to the purpose of the discussion itself. Sinaumed’s needs to know that the purpose of the FGD is definitely to get comprehensive and in-depth information on a topic from the interactions that take place during the discussion.

    6. Make a Decision 

    The final stage is that the team will make a final decision based on the results of the analysis. Generally, this decision is in the form of a public opinion that will reflect the topics discussed in the FGD.

    The decision will be in the form of members who pass because they meet the recruiter’s criteria, if the FGD is held in the context of selection.

    Now, it is increasingly clear that the FGD is a focused discussion that is carried out in order to collect deeper data from several respondents. Sinaumed’s must be prepared for the FGD process if they are involved in research, applying for a job, or a special project, right!

    How Do FGDs Support Community Engagement?

    FGD can be used during assessment, planning, monitoring and evaluation. The following is a complete explanation.

    1. During the assessment

    FGDs can be used to gain a deeper understanding of the context in society including community beliefs and values, social and cultural characteristics, power dynamics, capacities, and perceptions in assessments for additional guidance.

    2. During planning

    FGDs can be used to identify and prioritize solutions with the community, agree on program outcomes, activities, roles and responsibilities, and how we should work with the community during the program.

    3. For monitoring

    FGDs can be used to find out how well the program meets the needs of the community, whether it reaches the right people, supports independence and resilience and whether the community is satisfied with the quality of information, participation and influence they have over the program.

    4. During the evaluation

    FGDs can be used to evaluate whether the program meets community needs, whether support is relevant and timely, whether they are satisfied with the quality of information, participation and influence they have over the program and if there is anything they would like to improve the program in the future.

    How to Conduct FGD in the Community

    Plan the FGD

    • FGDs need a facilitator and note taker. Ideally the facilitator should have prior experience in facilitating FGDs.
    • Make sure the facilitator and note taker can speak the community language fluently or can work with an interpreter. Always run questions with translators first to make sure they understand it.
    • Translate all FGD questions into the relevant local language and test them with native speakers to make sure they make sense and are culturally appropriate.
    • It can help to practice FGD first through role play with the team, including translators.
    • Plan with the local branch where and when the FGD will be held and who should participate, so they can plan it with the community. Try to avoid participants being voted for by community leaders as this could introduce bias.
    • Consider whether to provide food and drink, but don’t pay community members to take part.

    Setting up groups

    • Identify a private room to hold the FGD so that not many people are listening.
    • Limit the number of people taking part to a maximum of 12, otherwise the conversation will be difficult to control. Ask community volunteers or community representatives to help you control numbers and offer to hold additional FGDs if more people want to participate so they don’t feel left out.
    • The participation of a community leader can influence the answers people give. A good tactic is to have other team members conduct key informant interviews with community leaders at the same time as the FGD.
    • Have people sit in a circle according to the diagram below:

    Tool16

    At the beginning

    • Introduce yourself and explain the purpose and duration of the FGD and allow participants to introduce themselves.
    • Ask for people’s consent to participate and permission to take notes.
    • Explain clearly that participating in the FGD does not guarantee that the community will receive support, nor does the community have to participate to receive support.
    • It can help to agree on ground rules up front, such as everyone has the right to speak, not to interrupt one another, there are no right answers, people can choose not to answer questions, and that anything shared should be kept private.

    When asking a question:

    • Do not ask “yes/no” or leading questions (i.e., “Do you agree that…?”)
    • Don’t get hung up on questions and rush through them. FGDs are open conversations, not surveys, so ask follow-up questions if something interesting comes up.
    • Ask sensitive questions in a polite and sensitive way, and know when to move on if a topic makes people feel uncomfortable.
    • Encourage everyone to talk. If someone isn’t speaking, ask for their opinion or if someone is talking too much, ask what the rest of the group thinks.
    • Don’t judge what people say, listen openly, even if you disagree and don’t react negatively to people’s answers.
    • If people raise issues related to protection or sexual exploitation and abuse, let them talk as much as they want but don’t pressure them for details in front of the group. Speak with them separately at the end of the FGD and ask for their permission to follow up on the matter and take their contact details. Sinaumed’s may need to refer this to the authorities.

    At the end

    • Ask people if they have questions for us.
    • Explain the next steps and be careful not to make promises or raise expectations about what will happen next.
    • Express gratitude to everyone for their time.

    After Conducting FGD

    • Review notes and add additional details so they won’t be forgotten.
    • Debrief with the team to get additional information about group dynamics, or changes to be made for the next FGD.
    • Analyze and use the information gathered during the FGDs, otherwise it will be a waste of time and may cause frustration in the community. Analysis includes:
    • For assessments, the FGD findings should be incorporated into the assessment report and will provide a deeper understanding of the community context and how to ensure that the community can participate in the planning stages.
    • For planning, FGD findings should be used to inform program design including activities, methods and how to ensure good participation, information sharing and feedback management.
    • For monitoring and evaluation, the feedback findings can be organized into what is working or working well and what is not working well and needs to be changed either during the current program or for future programmes.
    • Don’t forget to provide feedback to community leaders, representatives or local volunteers about the results of the FGD. Too often people take part in FGDs and then never hear from the agency again and this affects their willingness to take part in future discussions.

    Difference between FGD and Interview

    FGD is often compared to the interview method by jobseekers . In fact, the FGD method is completely different from the interview. The two are not the same even though they are both used in the recruitment process.

    Channel Play said that the first difference between interviews and FGDs was the number of participants. If interviews are generally conducted individually when the candidate will be alone talking to the recruiter in a closed room, the FGD will be held with around 4-15 people in an open room.

    Meanwhile, each participant must follow certain rules that usually do not exist in conventional interviews.

    Not only that, the duration of the FGD is generally longer than the interview. The reason is, FGDs can last for 60 to 90 minutes, depending on the pattern of discussion during the process. Meanwhile, the interview will take at least 20 to 45 minutes, depending on how the candidate answers the recruiter’s questions.

    Lastly, this is the main difference between the interview and the FGD. Interviews are conducted so that recruiters see the career aspirations and goals of candidates if they are accepted by the company. Meanwhile, the FGD aims for companies to know the mindset, personality, and abilities of each candidate in depth.

    Sinaumed’s, that’s an explanation regarding FGD broadly in various purposes. You can visit the sinaumedia.com website for more insights regarding group activities or self-development! #MoreWithReading.

     

    Author: Sevilla Nouval Evanda

  • What is a Fairytale? Definition, characteristics, structure, and elements

    Definition of Fairy Tales – Fairy tales are imaginary stories or stories that do not really happen. In general, fairy tales are entertaining and contain educational value. This fairy tale itself is made up and retold repeatedly by people. The story was made because it was inspired by an event.

    This fairy tale is also an inheritance from our ancestors which from generation to generation needs to be preserved. Although true or not a fairy tale needs to be questioned again. This fairy tale itself is a literary work that can build a child’s character to learn imagination.

    In addition, fairy tales are an old literary form that tells about an extraordinary event that occurs beyond human reason with full of fantasy and fantasy or fiction. Fairy tales are considered by society as something that doesn’t really happen in the real world.

    A. Definition of Fairy Tales Based on Experts

    Here are some definitions based on experts that you need to know, including:

    1. According to James Danandjaja

    James Danandjaja, stated that a fairy tale is a folklore that is not considered to have really happened by the masters of the story. This fairy tale pyla is not bound by any place or time. Because fairy tales are told to entertain.

    2. According to Poerwadar Minta

    Based on Poerwadar Minta, stated that fairy tales are stories about strange ancient events or stories that did not really happen.

    Fairy tales are told specifically to entertain, although many also describe the truth, contain lessons or morals and even satire. The storytelling of fairy tales contains implicit and explicit hopes, wishes, and good advice.

    3.Charles Perrault

    According to Charles Perrault, stated that a fairy tale is a short story about an imaginary adventure with supernatural and extraordinary situations and characters.

    B. Characteristics of Fairy Tales

    After you know about some of the meanings of fairy tales from experts, then you also need to know the characteristics of fairy tales.

     

    These characteristics of fairy tales are used to distinguish whether the story presented is a fairy tale or not. Here are some of the characteristics of fairy tales that you need to know, including:

    1. Spread orally

    In ancient times, fairy tales were transmitted orally. Later, fairy tales became known after being spread by word of mouth through words and from generation to generation.

    2. Distributed With Long Enough Time

    People will understand the meaning of fairy tales and their contents because they were spread for quite a long time, namely since the time of their ancestors. Because it was spread orally, this fairy tale also reached listeners for quite a long time.

    3. There are various versions

    Because the spread of fairy tales is done orally, it is not surprising that there are various versions of fairy tales that appear.

    4. Anonymous

    The author and creator of this fairy tale generally do not know who. But this fairy tale is always known and popular in society, especially in children.

    5. Has a Pattern

    The definition of fairy tales generally has characteristics that have patterned or formulaic forms, for example cliché words, standard opening words, and closing words.

    6. Has a Function

    The characteristics of the next story that has a function. This fairy tale itself has a function and use in collective and social life as an educational tool, solace, social protest, and projection of hidden desires.

    7. Has a Pralogical or Logical Nature

    The next characteristic of fairy tales is that they have their own prelogical and logical nature that are not in accordance with general logic or logic beyond human reason.

    8. Belongs to the Commons

    Because it is not known who was the first author or creator, people can feel they own it or in the sense that fairy tales become stories that belong together.

    9. Has a Plain Nature

    Fairy tales are generally innocent and innocent. So that it often looks harsh and too spontaneous when the delivery is deeper. It is understandable that this fairy tale itself is a projection of the most honest human emotions.

    10. Characterizations that are not detailed

    In fairy tales, they generally do not explain in detail about the nature and characterization of a character.

    C. Fairy Tale Structure

    After you have understood the meaning and characteristics, this fairy tale also has a standard structure in each writing. Please note that this fairy tale itself consists of three important parts, including:

     

     

    1. Introduction

    Introduction is the introductory part that is in a fairy tale. This section is generally made to briefly describe the contents of fairy tales.

    2. Event Contents

    The contents of events are the main and most important part in a fairy tale where the contents describe sequential events.

    3. Cover

    Closing is the final part contained in a fairy tale. In general, it contains a moral message and also a closing word.

    D. Elements of Fairy Tales

    In a fairy tale, of course there are several intrinsic elements that complement one another. The goal is that the readers understand what message it conveys and can feel the storyline that the fairy tale tells. Here are some elements that need to be in a fairy tale, including:

    1. Theme

    The theme is the main idea or idea that underlies a fairy tale. There are two types of themes in a story, including implied stories and explicit stories.

    2. Background

    Setting is a description of space, time, and also the atmosphere at the time an event occurs in a literary work.

    3. Groove

    The plot is a sequence of events in a fairy tale that are interrelated based on a causal relationship. Understanding plot will make it easier for readers to understand and understand an event in a story.

    4. Figures

    Characters are the actors in a fairy tale who play various events in the story.

    5. Characterization

    Characterization is the author’s way of presenting several characters with characters in fairy tales, both the nature, character and physical condition of the characters.

    6. Point of View

    Point of view is the author’s way of placing himself in a fairy tale and from what point of view the author views the story.

    7. Figure of speech

    Figure of speech is a style of language used in fairy tales with the aim of giving a certain effect so that fairy tales become more alive.

    8. Mandate

    Mandate is a moral message that fairy tale writers want to convey to their readers.

     

    E. How to Write Fairy Tales

    Anyone can make a fairy tale with their own version. After you get to know about the definition, characteristics, structure, and elements, this time you can make a fairy tale. Some tips for writing fairy tales include:

    1. Determining Characters

    The first tip you can do when writing a fairy tale is to first determine who the characters are in the fairy tale.

    2. Creating Conflict

    Every fairy tale certainly has its own story conflict. Therefore, you need to create conflict in a fairy tale you want to make.

    3. Determine the plot and setting of the story

    After you determine the characters and conflicts in a fairy tale, a writer also needs to determine what will happen to the story characters who experience conflict and how these characters find solutions to solve problems, how problems are encountered, and finally achieve the expectations they want.

    Also determine where the events of the story take place. You need to remember that fairy tales don’t have to be about events in the real world. Writers can create their own dreamland in the fairy tales they create.

    4. Write a Story

    After all the elements in the fairy tale have all been found. It’s time for you as a writer to be able to tell stories in a fairy tale based on sentence by sentence. If you want to make it more interesting, the writer can describe the storyline or make narration and dialogue so that it is not too boring. Don’t forget to choose an interesting point of view and everyone can accept the story.

    5. Read a lot

    Before writing fairy tales, a writer needs to read a lot about various fairy tales that have been created in order to get an inspiration to write.

    6. Practice

    Don’t forget to always practice so that the writing in fairy tales is systematic and easy for readers to understand and understand.

    F. Types of Fairy Tales

    Here are some types of fairy tales that you need to know, including:

     

     

    1. Mites or Myths

    Mites or myths are a type of fairy tale that describes things related to spirits, such as jinns, demons, and others. Examples of this myth or myth itself are Joko Tarub, Nyi Roro Kidul, and so on.

    2. Sage

    Sage is a type of fairy tale that tells the story of a certain historical character who has heroism, courage, supernatural powers, and kindness. Examples of sage are Airlangga, Calon Arang, Ciung Wanara, and so on.

    3. Fables

    Fable is a type of fairy tale that describes the life of animals where the animals can behave like humans. Examples of fables are mouse deer and crocodiles, ants and grasshoppers, and so on.

    3. Legend

    Legend is a type of fairy tale that some locals believe is true but is not considered sacred. Examples of legends are the Crying Stone, Lutung Kasarung, Lake Toba, and so on.

    4. Parabel

    Parabel is a type of fairy tale whose story contains educational value, whether it is moral or moral education, religion, and even education which is conveyed implicitly. An example of parables is Malin Kundang.

    Book Recommendations & Related Articles

  • What is a Diffuser? Get to know the Types, Benefits, and Side Effects

    Diffusers are becoming a trend along with the widespread use of aromatherapy. However, it’s good if you recognize the type and use before buying it. This is done so that you don’t choose the wrong one and can get the maximum benefit from the aromatherapy used.

    A diffuser is a tool that functions to convert essential oils into fragrant or aromatherapy vapors and spread them in the air, making them easier to breathe. Its use indoors can create a comfortable atmosphere. Therefore, this tool is often used to calm the mind and reduce stress.

    Diffuser Benefits and Functions

    In general, the function of the diffuser can provide a therapeutic effect or healing effect because it produces particles of essential oil . These particles will stimulate the nervous system to send signals to the limbic system in the brain.

    The brain will then respond with various physiological functions, such as releasing hormones, reducing pain, or a positive boost in mood. Other benefits include breathing therapy, mood enhancement, relaxation, air purification, and many more depending on the essential oil used.

    The recommended way to use it is 30–60 minutes by dripping 3–5 drops of essential oil. In addition, make sure the room where the diffuser is used has good ventilation. In order to function optimally, it should be placed in strategic areas, such as at the desk, next to the bed, to the middle of the living room.

    1. For Body Relaxation

    In the essential oils that you blend in, there are essential oils that can effectively have a relaxing effect on the body. Therefore, you can keep it on your desk so your mind can be free from stress or keep it in the bedroom area to improve the quality of your sleep.

    2. To prevent flu and colds

    Essential oils contain organic compounds and anti-microbial properties, so when spread with a diffuser, these ingredients will come into direct contact with pathogens that are spread in the air to make it more difficult for bacteria to attack the body. In fact, essential oils can boost your immune system so that you are not susceptible to illnesses such as flu, colds and coughs.

    3. To Smooth Breathing

    For those of you who have respiratory allergies, its use with essential oils is also very good for reducing congestion and inflammation of the respiratory tract. As a result, using it effectively can make you breathe easier and overcome respiratory allergies while indoors.

    4. To Overcome Pain

    Essential oils can also effectively relieve headaches, muscle aches and joint pains by applying them to the affected area. Well, you can also expand the effect of essential oils using a diffuser so as to maximize their use to treat pain in a number of body parts.

    5. To Repel Mosquitoes and Insects

    As we know, flies and mosquitoes that settle in the house can be a source of dangerous diseases. The use of essential oils can effectively repel flies and mosquitoes. That way, you no longer need to use insect poisons that harm your health.

    6. For Essential Fragrance

    Aromatherapy candles or air fresheners are more commonly known to many people to provide a winning aromatherapy in the room. However, both are not necessarily safe because there is a risk of fire that can occur when using aromatherapy candles.

    Diffusers are superior because they act as air purifiers through the molecules that are dispersed and at the same time provide essential fragrances in the room. This tool provides features that you can adjust according to your wishes and room conditions.

    7. To Improve Sleep Quality

    With essential oils it provides a calming relaxing effect in the room. This created atmosphere helps people of all ages to fall asleep more quickly and soundly. To treat insomnia, you can mix lavender, Bulgarian rose, and Roman chamomile essential oils.

    With this tool, you can not only get creative with a blend of essential oils to create a relaxing scent. What’s more, it creates a gentle buzzing sound that helps calm a restless mind.

    8. To Control Appetite

    If you are trying to control your appetite, you should try using it in your home. Vaporized peppermint essential oil has been shown to curb appetite by triggering the body’s satiety response. Peppermint oil has also been shown to be able to increase energy, so you stay energized even if you reduce your portion sizes.

    9. To Improve Cognitive Function

    With essential oils it is proven to improve the body’s cognitive function because it has adaptogenic qualities. There are several types of essential oils that can increase focus, balance the body’s hormones, and have a calming effect. Its use can provide therapy to prevent factors that inhibit cognitive function.

    10. To Control Decongestion and Mucus

    Diffusers can be used as an alternative to vaporub and have a wider range. Vaporub is only focused on the chest and neck area, while the diffuser is all over the room.

     

    Use of Diffuser indoors

    For its use, you are free to choose according to the needs and size of the room. However, make sure the water mixing process is adjusted according to the size and type of essential oil you are using considering that several types of oil can be used without having to mix it with water.

    You need to know, aromatherapy tools also have a relatively small size so that their distribution only covers a small area. So, place the diffuser in a strategic area, for example on the desk, next to the bed or in the middle of the family room.

    It has many positive benefits for health and can provide natural freshness in the room, so there’s nothing wrong with using it as a natural room humidifier. So, please choose an aromatherapy tool that can beautify the room at the same time, and choose the essential oil that suits your needs!

    Types of Diffusers

    There are various types that can be used with essential oils as aromatherapy, including:

    1. Candle Diffuser

    The most traditional type that is easy to find and has a fairly affordable price. This type utilizes hot temperatures to produce aromatherapy steam. How to use it is by dripping essential oil and water in the diffuser container, then place a lit candle underneath. Although practical and easy to use, this heat may change the chemical structure of essential oils, making aromatherapy less effective.

    2. Ceramic Diffuser

    As the name implies, this type is made of ceramic or clay. Unlike the types of candles that use heat, ceramic diffusers use ultrasonic sound waves to turn liquid essential oils into aromatherapy vapors. How to use it is also very easy, you only need to put a drop of aromatherapy oil in the diffuser so that the aromatherapy spreads in the air. Ceramic diffusers are more suitable for use in small spaces.

    3. Reed Diffusers

    Reed diffusers are usually sold in a package with a bottle of aromatherapy oil. This type is unique because it does not use heat or electricity, but uses rattan sticks. The stems of this plant can absorb the aromatherapy oil stored in the bottle, then release it into the air to produce a fragrant aroma in the room.

    4.Electric Diffuser

    As with the previous type, this type does not use heat energy. How to use it is by dripping aromatherapy oil or essential oil into the water, then place the water and oil mixture into the diffuser container. An electric fan inside the diffuser will create the aromatherapy vapor and disperse it into the air.

    5. Nebulizer Diffusers

    Nebulizer diffusers work by breaking down essential oils into small molecules before diffusing them into the room. This device has a cylindrical glass bottle in the middle so it looks elegant. The advantage of this type is its wide range, making it suitable for use in large rooms. However, nebulizer diffusers are more difficult to clean than other types. In addition, this type can also cause noise.

    6.Ultrasonic Diffuser

    Ultrasonic diffuser works by producing a fine mist, so it is easily released into the air. This type of diffuser also functions to moisten dry room air. Some ultrasonic diffusers can turn off automatically to control the amount of essential oil that is dispersed into the air. Not only that, this type tends to be cheaper than diffuser nebulizers and is more sturdy.

     

    Diffuser recommendations

    1. Taffware Ultrasonic Humidifier HUMI ​​AJ213

    For those of you who have a minimalist style room or office, sinaumedia recommends this mini Taffware aromatherapy device. This diffuser only has a water capacity of 125 ml and the operating duration is quite long. You can leave it on for up to 180 minutes.

    Interestingly, you can set the time as you wish, starting from 30 minutes, 60 minutes, 120 minutes, or up to 180 minutes. When the time is up, the machine will automatically turn itself off. This diffuser also functions as a humidifier to keep the air moist in the room. This Taffware Diffuser is equipped with 7 different colors of LED lights that can replace your night light.

    2. GOTO Humion Humidifier Diffuser

    Need a recommendation that’s ethnic in design, but doesn’t look old-fashioned? GOTO Humion is the answer. Its modern and futuristic body design is wrapped in wood accents to accentuate a homey impression. Even if it’s not turned on, the GOTO diffuser is also suitable as a unique room decoration.

    It has a large water capacity because it can hold up to 300 ml of water with a steam spray duration of up to 6 hours. With that long duration, you might be wondering about the electric power. Calm. The GOTO diffuser doesn’t waste electricity. This aromatherapy tool is available in two color choices, namely Darkwood and Lightwood.

    3. Han River Aroma Diffuser HRXXJ01

    If you are looking for an aromatherapy tool with a water tank that can fit more, the next recommendation is the Han River Aroma Diffuser HRXXJ01. This 15-centimeter diameter diffuser can hold 500 ml of water to spray steam non-stop for up to 12 hours. Another plus point of this Han River diffuser is the choice of evaporation mode and the built-in remote control .

    You can select continuous, timed or intermittent spray modes by simply pressing the button on the remote control . With this remote control you can also choose the size of the water vapor molecule, big or small ( fine mist ). When turned on, this aromatherapy device is quiet when used so you can sleep peacefully.

    4. Bayfresh Reed Diffuser

    Want recommendations for aromatherapy tools without electricity or machines? You can choose a reed diffuser. Reed diffuser is an incense stick made of rattan. All you have to do is dip a few sticks of incense into a bottle filled with your favorite essential oil. It doesn’t take long for the incense stick to absorb the oil and spread the aroma naturally without creating a mist.

    Well, Bayfresh is one of the pocket-friendly reed diffuser recommendations. Bayfresh Reed has several fragrance variants that you can choose from, such as yuzu peach, vanilla bean, sakura bloom, amber lavender , and morning coffee . The fragrance consistently lasts up to 30 days.

    5. GOTO Tama Diffuser

    One more recommendation from the GOTO brand, but this one has a cute and adorable design. Especially if you like cat characters. The Tama diffuser has a capacity of 300 ml and can be used for 4–8 hours. There are two steam modes that you can choose from, namely continuous steam mode (lasts 4 hours) and intermittent steam mode (lasts 8 hours).

    This one GOTO diffuser has a silent system so it doesn’t make noise. The way to use it is the same as any other aromatherapy machine. But before the first use, you need to put the cotton stick in the water for 2 minutes, then turn it on. You can choose white, green or pink color variants.

    6. StarHome Air Humidifier

    StarHome humidifier is a recommendation for those of you who want to cover a large area. Because this diffuser has a tank capacity of up to 1 liter. The steam spray is soft (fine mist) and not noisy, very suitable for use in spaces of 30–40 m. One water charge can last up to 24 hours of use. Don’t be afraid of shorting when left out all day long. This diffuser is equipped with auto-off after 9 hours of use or when the water runs out.

    7. Basike LED Nano Water Mist Diffuser BSK-JSQ03

    This diffuser works with an atomization system to convert water molecules into nano vapor particles. The vapor droplets are so small that when they fall on the surface of an object, they won’t make them feel wet or damp like they’re exposed to water.

    The capacity of this diffuser’s water tank is 320 ml which can be used for up to 6 hours. The engine is not noisy either. Interestingly, apart from being a diffuser or humidifier, this one also has a projector feature. The diffuser base can emit star and moon patterns that make it feel like we are sleeping under the night sky.

    Tips for using the diffuser

    So, now that you know what the cheapest and best diffusers are, you also have to understand the tips for using them. Apart from that, you should also not forget to clean your diffuser regularly. This is because the remaining water can make the container damp and become a breeding ground for bacteria. As a result, when it is used again, the steam emitted actually becomes filled with bacteria.

    The easiest and safest way to clean a diffuser is to wipe it. Dampen a cotton swab or washcloth (cloth) with white vinegar or rubbing alcohol, and carefully wipe the entire unit. Make sure all the nooks and crannies are cleaned, then make sure the tool is dry before using it again. To be safer, first read how to care for the tool in the instruction sheet included in each product packaging.

    Types of Oil Diffuser that is Often Used

    Here are some essential oils that are often used because of their beneficial therapeutic effects and provide a refreshing diffuser aroma:

    1. Lavender

    Lavender is calming, good for relieving emotional and physical problems such as minor skin injuries, cramps and stuffy nose, headaches, anxiety disorders, and insomnia.

    2. Tea Tree

    Thai tree is believed to have antimicrobial activity, tea tree is known for its many benefits to help skin care, acne treatment, and nail fungus.

    3. Peppermint

    This type of essential oil is believed to improve respiratory function and relieve nasal congestion. The aroma can also stimulate the brain to relieve nausea and improve brain function.

    4. Oranges

    Orange essential oil is useful for reducing anxiety and stress. In addition, this oil can calm the nervous system and promote healthy lymphatic flow.

    5. Lemons

    This type of oil is used to increase endurance, improve blood circulation and lymphatic flow. The antibacterial and antiviral properties present in lemon make it useful in treating skin conditions from insect bites, boils, and acne.

     

    Side Effects of Using a Diffuser

    It is important to remember that these aromatherapy tools have not been proven to be safe and effective as a method for evaporating antiseptic liquids to sterilize air. This actually risks causing side effects, such as irritation to the respiratory tract and eyes.

    The use of aromatherapy tools so far has only been useful for optimizing the benefits of essential oils. The scattered aroma will stimulate the sense of smell and affect the emotions and nervous system. However, this depends on the type of aromatherapy used.

    Several types of aromatherapy with a diffuser are also claimed to have a relaxing effect, reduce pain, calm the mind, and make you sleep better. However, use it according to the directions for use and clean it after use to stay safe. Limit use so that it is not too long, which is around 30-60 minutes. When using an aromatherapy tool, make sure the room where it is used has good ventilation.

    Even though it is quite safe to use, you should stop using aromatherapy with a diffuser and consult a doctor if you experience symptoms of irritation or allergies, such as itching, watery eyes, and a runny nose after using the tool.

  • What is a commutative property: definition, formula, and examples

    In mathematics, there are several discussions about arithmetic operations. The arithmetic operations in mathematics generally have several properties in them. Starting from commutative, associative, and also distributive properties. Then, what is meant by commutative property? What is the definition of associative property? What is the meaning of the distributive property? What is an example of the commutative property? Where all three apply to the arithmetic operating system of division, subtraction, addition, and also multiplication. To work on various kinds of problems related to commutative properties, there are many different ways or methods.

    These three properties are indeed different, because they have the goal of making learning arithmetic operations easier for basic education. In learning mathematics, generally teachers will use more integers so that solving problems given to students does not cause them difficulties. In material for mathematical arithmetic operations, there will usually be an explanation of the meaning of commutative properties, overall understanding, examples of problems, and so on.

    As we already understand, mathematical operations such as multiplication, subtraction, addition, and division have various properties in them. This property is useful in learning mathematics that uses more integers. However, you need to know that the three properties above have different ways of working and methods for each arithmetic operation.

    In this article, we will discuss what the commutative property is, along with a brief explanation of the other two properties, such as associative and distributive properties. To be clearer, you can read the article below:

    Definition of Commutative Properties

    In general, Mathematics has basic arithmetic operations such as subtraction, addition, division, and multiplication. The arithmetic operations apply to the form of algebraic numbers, fractions, and so on. Because, its use is very broad, therefore the way to do it in each arithmetic operation also varies depending on the form of the number. But on the other hand, there are also several properties that are used in each arithmetic operation such as commutative properties, associative properties, and also distributive properties.

    As we discussed earlier, that mathematical arithmetic operations have several properties in them. Starting from commutative, distributive, and associative. In the following, there are several explanations regarding the notion of commutative properties, distributive properties, and associative properties along with examples of problems.

    Commutative or Exchange Properties

    The first thing we will discuss is the definition of the commutative property. So, commutative is the property of arithmetic operations that is used to swap the location of two numbers so that the resulting value is the same. The commutative property can also be called the commutative law. The following is the commutative property written by the formula:

    a + b = b + a = c

    Information:

    a and b are two numbers to be operated on
    c is the result of arithmetic operations

    note: The commutative nature of arithmetic operations has a provision that even if the numbers being counted have their positions interchanged, the results will be the same.

    The commutative property basically exists in the arithmetic operations of multiplication and addition. This is because the concepts in this nature fulfill the conditions in the arithmetic operation. The following is a full explanation:

    The Commutative Property of Addition

    After explaining the meaning of the commutative property, then we will discuss the application of the commutative property in addition operations. The following is the addition formula using the commutative property:

    a + b = b + a = c

    So that we can better understand the above formula, here are some examples of commutative problems in addition. For more details, see examples of addition problems that use the commutative property below:

    a. 4 + 5 = 5 + 4 = 9, where 4 + 5 = 9 and 5 + 4 = 9
    b. 7 + 8 = 8 + 7 = 15, where 7 + 8 = 15 and 8 + 7 = 15

    The Commutative Property of Multiplication

    The operation to calculate multiplication also uses the commutative property in it. The following is a formula for the commutative property that uses the multiplication arithmetic operation:

    a × b = b × a = c

    In order to better understand the above formula, in the following there will be an example of a problem regarding the commutative property in multiplication. An example of a multiplication problem that uses the commutative property is as follows:

    a. 2 x 3 = 3 x 2 = 6, where 2 x 3 = 6 and 3 x 2 = 6
    b. 4 x 5 = 5 x 4 = 20, where 4 x 5 = 20 and 5 x 4 = 20

    As previously discussed, that in the sense of the commutative property above it only applies to addition and multiplication arithmetic operations. Therefore, division as well as subtraction of integers will not apply the commutative property. This is because in this operation there are unequal values ​​if the numbers are exchanged. For example, as below:

    a. 5 – 3 = 2 is different from 3 – 5 = (-2)
    b. 9 : 3 = 3 in contrast to 3 : 9 = 0.33

    Examples of Commutative Properties in Addition and Multiplication

    The following are some examples of commutative property problems in addition and multiplication:

    1. Examples of Commutative Properties in the Addition of Positive/Negative Integers

    Below is an example of a commutative problem in adding positive or negative integers. Check out the full explanation to make it easier to understand.

    a. Examples of Commutative Properties in Adding Positive Integers with Positive

    Formula:

    a + b = b + a

    Example:

    2 + 3 = 3 + 2

    2 + 3 = 6 and 3 + 2 = 6

    In the pattern mentioned above, whether the numbers 2 or 3 are in front or behind, then the result of two plus three or three plus two is equal to six.

    b. Examples of Commutative Properties in Addition of Positive and Negative Integers

    Formula:

    a + b = b + a

    Example:

    4 + (-6) = -6 + 4

    4 + (-6)= -2 and -6 + 4= -2

    c. Examples of Commutative Properties in Adding Negative Integers with Negatives

    Formula:

    a + b = b + a

    Example:

    -2 + -5 = -5 + -2

    -2 + -5= -7 and -5 + -2 also = -7

    2. Examples of Commutative Properties in Multiplication of Positive and Negative Numbers

    The following are examples of questions about the commutative property of multiplying positive and negative numbers. For more details, see the full explanation below.

    a. Examples of Commutative Properties in Multiplying Positive Integers with Positives

    Formula:

    axb = bxa

    Example:

    4 x 5 = 5 x 4

    4 x 5 = 5 + 5 + 5 + 5 = 20
    5 x 4 = 4 + 4 + 4 + 4 + 4 = 20

    4 x 5 = 20 and 5 x 4 also equals 20

    In the pattern mentioned above, whether the number 4 or 5 is in front or behind, then the result of four times five or five times four is equally twenty

    b. Examples of Commutative Properties in Multiplying Positive and Negative Integers

    Formula:

    axb = bxa

    Example:

    2 x -5 = -5 x 2

    2 x -5 = -10 and -5 x 2 also = -10

    c. Examples of Commutative Properties in Multiplying Negative and Negative Integers

    Formula:

    axb = bxa

    Example:

    -3 x -4 = -4 x -3

    -3 x -4 = 12 and -4 x -3 also = 12

    Why doesn’t the commutative property apply to subtraction and division?

    We cannot apply the commutative property to subtraction and division. Because if the commutative nature of arithmetic operations, subtraction or division is applied, the results will not be the same.

    Here’s the proof:

    1. The commutative property formula cannot be applied to subtraction arithmetic operations because a – b ≠ b – a ( a minus b the result is not the same as b minus a)

    a – b ≠ b – a

    10 – 5 ≠ 5 – 10

    10 – 5 = 5, while 5 – 10 = -5

    Until here, explain that the results of 10-5 are not the same as the results of 5-10

    2. The commutative property formula cannot be applied to division arithmetic operations because a : b ≠ b : a ( a divided by b the result is not the same as b divided by a)

    a : b ≠ b : a

    20 : 4 ≠ 4 : 20

    20 : 4 = 5, while 4 : 20 = 0.2

    Book Recommendations

    Book Description

    Mathematics is a basic science that plays a very important role in the development of science and technology and advances human thinking. The presence of this book is expected to add to the reference and become a reference for students in particular and those who are interested in mathematics in general.

    Book Description

    This book briefly presents theories and mathematical problem solving related to: number systems, graphs, functions, limits, derivatives (differentials), use of derivatives, transcendent functions, integrals, integration techniques, use of integrals, conic sections and polar coordinates, derivative in n-dimensional space, integral in n-dimensional space,

    Book Description

    This book is different from other Applied Mathematics books because this book has advantages in its study. The theory given is brief and concise and accompanied by examples and solutions that are complete and complete.

  • What Happened at Rengasdengklok? Here’s the History and Chronology

    What Happened at Rengasdengklok – Sinaumed’s must be no stranger to the historical events of Rengasdengklok? Yep, the Rengasdengklok incident was touted as the first milestone of Indonesian independence after years of being colonized by the Dutch and Japanese. Thanks to this independence, Indonesia can become the country it is today, which is able to be on par with other countries.

    Then actually, what happened in Rengasdengklok? Why can it be the first milestone of Indonesian independence? Apart from that, why is it also called the Rengasdengklok Incident?

    So, so that Sinaumed’s can understand and answer these questions, let’s look at the following review!

    What happened at Rengasdengklok?

    In general, the incident that occurred at Rengasdengklok was a kidnapping carried out by a number of youth groups against Soekarno and Hatta. It is called the Rengasdengklok incident because when the two big figures were kidnapped, they were taken to a place called Rengasdengklok, which is located in Karawang Regency.

    So, it can be concluded that Rengasdengklok is the name of a city that became a silent witness to the kidnapping of these two great Indonesian figures.

    The kidnapping action was the idea of ​​young people, including Soekarni, Wikana, Sayuti Melik, and Chaerul Saleh. Even though it is called kidnapping which has a bad connotation, it turns out that the action turned out to be a good idea. The purpose of the kidnapping carried out by the youth group was so that Soekarno and Hatta, as representatives of Indonesian leaders, immediately accelerated the proclamation of Indonesian independence.

    What Happens If the Rengasdengklok Event Never Exists?

    Try to think about it again, what would have happened if the Rengasdengklok Incident, which was the first milestone of Indonesian independence, had never existed?

    The answer is that there are five possibilities and the biggest possibility is that Indonesia also may not be able to carry out its independence until it becomes the country it is today. The five possibilities are:

    1. Indonesia may not necessarily be independent.
    2. The older classes will be increasingly influenced by the Japanese.
    3. Japan will continue to colonize Indonesia, even though at that time their country was being bombed by the Allies.
    4. The suffering of the Indonesian people will increase because their country does not immediately achieve independence.
    5. Japan will get stronger especially in the eyes of the world.

    What is the Chronology of the Rengasdengklok Event?

    1. Japan Unconditionally Surrenders to the Allies

    At the end of 1943, Japan’s position in the Asia Pacific war began to be pushed. Several times the Japanese army had to lose to the Allied troops. Until finally, the United States military succeeded in bombing two cities in Japan namely in Hiroshima (on August 6, 1945) and Nagasaki (9 August 1945) which are located in Japan.

    As a result of the bombing, the political and economic conditions in Japan of course paralyzed immediately. This finally forced the Japanese to surrender unconditionally to the Allies on August 14, 1945.

    With Japan’s unconditional surrender it also affected the Indonesian nation in the form of a power vacuum (Indonesia was previously controlled by the Japanese).

    2. Opinion of the Old Group VS Opinion of the Young Group

    The news about Japan’s defeat against the Allies finally reached the ears of Indonesian youths in the city of Bandung. They heard the news of the defeat through BBC ( British Broadcasting Corporation ) radio broadcasts.

    The Indonesian youth or what is often referred to as the youth group consists of Wikana, Sukarni, Sayuti Melik, Yusuf Kunto, Iwa Kusuma, Chaerul Saleh, and Singgih.

    After hearing the news, they immediately met Bung Karno and Bung Hatta at Jalan Pegangsaan Timur No. 56. There, the youth group appointed Sutan Syahrir as the representative for the youth group by requesting that Bung Karno and Bung Hatta immediately make the proclamation of independence.

    However, Bung Karno did not approve of this idea. He thought that the proclamation of Indonesia needed to be discussed in advance at the PPKI (Committee for Indonesian Independence) meeting.

    The young people who were on fire with heroism finally had a discussion with some of their members. The discussion resulted in a decision in the form of the need to exile Bung Karno and Bung Hatta out of town so that they would avoid any influence from the Japanese.

    On August 16, 1945 at 04.30 in the morning, the youth group together with a PETA member succeeded in kidnapping Bung Karno and Bung Hatta to the Rengasdengklok area. Not only these two big figures, but the younger group also brought Bung Karno’s wife, Fatmawati, and their son, Guntur, along with them.

    At Rengasdengklok, Bung Karno and Bung Hatta were guarded by the PETA Company Commander, namely Cudanco Subeno. There, young groups tried to convince Bung Karno to immediately declare independence because there was still a power vacuum. Young people have also been prepared for any risks, including fighting the Japanese.

    Meanwhile, in Jakarta there were also discussions between the young and the old. In the old group there are several big figures, including Ahmad Subardjo with several BPUPKI and PPKI members.

    In the negotiations between the young and old groups, an agreement was reached that the proclamation of independence would and must be carried out in Jakarta. Finally, after the negotiation process between these big and formidable figures, Bung Karno and Bung Hatta were ready to declare independence when they returned to Jakarta.

    So after the negotiations got the desired result, Yusuf Kunto from the youth group accompanied Ahmad Soebardjo to Rengasdengklok. Then, together they picked up Bung Karno and Bung Hatta to return to Jakarta. Ahmad Soebardjo even guaranteed that the proclamation of Indonesian independence would be announced the following day, namely August 17, 1945.

    3. Preparation of the Text of the Proclamation

    After the Rengasdengklok incident occurred and Bung Karno was prepared to declare independence on August 17, 1945, when the group was in Jakarta, the proclamation text was prepared. In the evening of August 16, 1945, the drafting of the proclamation was carried out. The deliberation was held at the house of Admiral Maeda, a chief representative of the Japanese Navy, which is located at Jalan Imam Bonjol No.1 Jakarta.

    Sinaumed’s , you must be confused why Admiral Maeda, a head of the Japanese Navy allowed his house to be used as a headquarters in preparing the text of the proclamation?

    This is because Admiral Maeda happened to be close to Indonesian youths and was friendly with Ahmad Soebardjo. In addition, Admiral Maeda deeply sympathized with the struggle of the Indonesian people to achieve independence.

    The choice of Admiral Maeda’s house was a pretty brilliant idea because the house was guaranteed to be safe because Admiral Maeda had a high position and was highly respected by the Japanese Army around him. Now, the house has been used as the Museum of the Proclamation Manuscript Formulation.

    That same night, deliberations were immediately held between the young and old groups in order to draft the text of the proclamation. The preparation of the text of the proclamation went smoothly with the first sentence in the text being the result of the ideas of Bung Karno and Ahmad Soebardjo and the last sentence being the idea of ​​Bung Hatta.

    After the draft of the proclamation text was finished, written by Bung Karno, it was immediately read in front of the audience. Bung Karno and Bung Hatta suggested that the manuscript should be signed by all those present. However, Sukarni made a suggestion that it would be better if only Bung Karno and Bung Hatta signed the text, on behalf of the Indonesian nation.

    The proposal from Sukarni was approved by the audience and then the text of the proclamation was typed by Sayuti Melik using his typewriter.

    So, it was decided that the proclamation of Indonesian independence would be read at Bung Karno’s residence, located at Jalan Pegangsaan Timur No. 56 Jakarta, at exactly 10.00 WIB.

    4. Reading the Text of the Proclamation

    Before the text of the proclamation was read, Bung Karno first made a speech about how the struggle of the Indonesian nation to achieve its independence. After that, the Saka Merah Putih was hoisted by Suhud and Latief. Then, the last event was the remarks by the Mayor of Jakarta, namely Suwirjo and Dr. Muwardi.

    Things That Happened After the Rengasdengklok Incident

    After the kidnapping of Soekarno and Hatta by young people in Rengasdengklok, Karawang Regency, the proclamation of Indonesian independence was finally realized. Even though they only used makeshift facilities and places, through the support of the people, Indonesia finally succeeded in being free from foreign colonialism.

    Unfortunately, after the proclamation of independence was declared, there were even rebellions in several areas which could actually threaten the integrity of the country. So, here are some things that happened after the Proclamation of Independence of the Republic of Indonesia.

    1. Linggarjati Negotiations

    This negotiation was named that because it took place in Linggarjati, Kuningan, West Java. These negotiations took place between the Indonesian and Dutch parties, which then resulted in an agreement regarding the status of Indonesian independence. The Linggajati Agreement was finally legally signed at the Merdeka Palace, Jakarta, on March 25, 1947.

    Unfortunately, this agreement actually caused serious conflict between the two countries, because at that time AFNEI (Allied Forces Netherlands East Indies) was backed by NICA to Indonesia.

    It should be noted that AFNEI is the designation for the Allied forces whose job is to bring home and disarm the Japanese soldiers. Well, indirectly this caused the Allies to “enter” back into Indonesia.

    2. The Westerling Incident

    This event is actually history for the Indonesian people, because at that time the Dutch troops carried out a large-scale massacre of thousands of civilians in South Sulawesi.

    The Westerling Affair is so called because the attempted massacre was led by Raymond Pierre Paul Westerling from December 1946 to February 1747, during the Counter Insurgency military operation.

    As a result, the total number of people in South Sulawesi who were slaughtered in this inhumane event is not known. However, the Delegation of the Republic of Indonesia in 1947 conveyed to the UN Security Council that the number of victims of the massacre reached 40,000 people.

    The reason for this incident was due to the arrival of Allied troops to clear the South Sulawesi region from Republican fighters and quell popular resistance against the formation of the State of East Indonesia.

    3. Battle of Puputan Margarana

    The Puputan Margarana battle also took place between the Indonesian and Dutch sides, on November 20, 1946. The battle was led by Colonel I Gusti Ngurah Rai.

    Troops from the Indonesian side desperately drove out the Allied troops who had the guise of wanting to re-colonize Indonesia and re-establish the Dutch East Indies, after Japan lost in World War II.

    The Battle of Puputan Margarana killed all of Colonel I Gusti Ngurah Rai’s troops. As a result of the death of Colonel I Gusti Ngurah Rai and his troops, the Dutch succeeded in establishing the State of East Indonesia (NIT). Then, in the State of East Indonesia, Tjokorda Gedhe Raka Soekawati was appointed as its president through a Denpasar Conference, on 18-24 December 1946.

    It should be noted that the reason for the Dutch ” ngoyo ” to establish the State of East Indonesia was to compete with and force the Republic of Indonesia to accept the form of a federated state. The State of East Indonesia is one of the many “puppet” countries created by the Dutch.

    This battle is remembered as the Puputan Incident. In Balinese, “Puputan” means an effort to fight for victory to the last drop of blood which is done during war, rather than having to surrender to the enemy.

    4. Proclamation of the Pasundan State

    After establishing NIT, the Dutch continued to launch their actions in creating this puppet state. The next target is Pasundan. The Dutch succeeded in persuading Soeria Kartalegawa, Chairperson of the Pasundan People’s Party, to proclaim the State of Pasundan on 4 May 1947.

    This Pasundan country can be said to be very weak in its military, so it is very dependent on the Dutch for strength. When the Netherlands carried out Military Aggression, then this country existed in the eyes of the people.

    5. Military Aggression I

    Military Aggression I was a military operation carried out by the Dutch in Java and Sumatra, from 21 July 1947 – 5 August 1947. The term Military Aggression I was coined by Lieutenant Governor General Johannes van Mook, who emphasized that the results of the Linggarjati Negotiations were no longer valid. happen again. The Indonesian side considers this action to be a form of violation of the Linggajati Negotiations.

    Indonesia then complained about this action to the United Nations because it was considered to have violated an international agreement, namely the Linggajati Negotiations. With assistance from Australia and India who also requested that the issue of military aggression be put on the agenda of the UN Security Council, it was approved, on 31 July 1947.

    The United Nations passed a resolution calling for the armed conflict to end. Not only that, the United Nations also recognizes the existence of the Unitary State of the Republic of Indonesia by calling it “Indonesia” not “Netherlands Indies” or “Dutch East Indies” anymore.

    The Action of Military Aggression I was stopped on August 15, 1947 due to pressure from the UN to the Dutch Government.

    6. Appointment of Amir Syarifudin as Prime Minister

    After the first Military Aggression action, a political figure named Amir Syarifudin who previously served as Minister of Defense, was appointed to the post of Prime Minister to replace Sutan Sjahrir.

    Amir Syarifudin offered Kartosoewirjo the position of second deputy defense minister, but the offer was rejected. Kartosoewirjo had the desire to withdraw from politics, because he had witnessed that Indonesia’s political conditions were very unfavorable, due to the agreements previously made with the Dutch.

    Not only that, Kartosoewirjo also did not like Amir Syarifudin’s political direction which tended towards communism. It should be noted that the end of Amir Syarifudin’s life was by being executed. This was because he was considered involved in the 1948 Madiun incident.

    7. Renville Agreement

    Again, Indonesia made an agreement with the Dutch called the Renville Agreement, on January 17, 1948. This agreement was intended to resolve disputes over the Linggarjati Agreement that had been made previously. In this Renville agreement, the boundary between Indonesia and the Netherlands was created, which is known as the Van Mook Line.

    8. Mohammad Hatta Appointed as Prime Minister

    Previously, it was explained that Amir Syarifudin was appointed Prime Minister. So, after the Amir’s Cabinet collapsed, especially after the Renville Agreement was signed, President Soekarno appointed Moh. Hatta to become Prime Minister.

    Moh. Hatta was asked to lead an emergency “presidential cabinet” from 1948 to 1949, for which all accountability was reported to President Soekarno.

    9. Dutch Military Aggression II

    Again, the Dutch launched Military Aggression II. This action was preceded by an attack on Yogyakarta, which at that time was the capital of Indonesia. Military Aggression II occurred on December 19, 1948 and was accompanied by the arrest of several major figures, for example Soekarno, Moh. Hatta, Sjahrir, and others.

    This caused Indonesia to experience a power vacuum, which eventually led to the formation of the Emergency Government of the Republic of Indonesia in Bukittinggi, Sumatra, led by Sjafruddin Prawiranegara. It should be noted that Sjafruddin Prawiranegara is also a national hero who must be remembered, because without his services, Indonesian power could have fallen back into the hands of the Dutch.

    10. March 1st General Offensive

    As the name implies, this massive attack took place on March 1, 1949. This attack was planned by the Indonesian side, primarily based on the instructions of the Commander in Chief Sudirman. The March 1 General Offensive was carried out to prove that the Indonesian military still exists and is strong enough, so that it can indirectly strengthen Indonesia’s position, especially when the UN Security Council negotiations are in progress.

    So, that’s an explanation of what happened in Rengasdengklok and what events occurred when Indonesia succeeded in proclaiming its independence on August 17, 1945.

    Recommended Books & Articles Related to Rengasdengklok

  • What are VPNs? Definition, Benefits, Strengths and Weaknesses

    What are VPNs? – Currently, VPN is being hailed in the process of surfing the internet network. In fact, there are many different types of VPN available and users only have to choose according to their needs.

    Even when cases of theft of personal data in the digital world are rife, VPNs are said to be a safe solution for such cases. Is that true?

    Then, what exactly is a VPN? How does a VPN work so that it can be called “safe” for its users?

    So, so that Sinaumed’s knows the answers to these questions, let’s look at the following explanation about VPNs!

    Understanding VPN

    VPN stands for Virtual Private Network , aka a secure internet network connection for its users. Through a VPN, the access that you give to any website can run securely and privately , namely by changing the connection path through the server and hiding any data exchange that occurs.

    How does that mean?

    Now, a VPN connects a smartphone (can also be a PC or tablet) to another computer somewhere connected to the internet, so a VPN can be useful for “permissions” in browsing the internet to use a computer internet network.

    So, if the computer ( server ) is in a different country, then the internet connection that you use adjusts to the VPN from that country. A VPN can also be useful for accessing things that you previously couldn’t access from your country.

    In ancient times, VPN became a service that was often used by companies or organizations in an effort to protect their data. However, now with the development of the times, VPNs can be used by various users to access sites that have regional or connection restrictions.

    How Do VPNs Work?

    The way a VPN works is by encrypting data exchange before connecting publicly. Encryption is the process of turning information into a secret code to obscure data sent, received or stored on the internet network.

    Someone using a VPN is tantamount to accessing the internet through a special network so that other people don’t know about it.

    The VPN server will later be tasked with forwarding the connection to the destination site that you will access. So, the connection you make will be recognized as a connection from the VPN server network, not from the network used at that time.

    Simply put, if you access a site without using a VPN, then your network connection will be made directly ( directly ) without the encryption process. However, if you use a VPN, your network connection will first go through an encryption process via the VPN server.

    If you use a VPN to access Google, Youtube, or other entertainment platforms, it won’t cause any problems.

    However, if you use a VPN to access data in online banking processes or business emails, then of course it will cause problems. This is because in the network towards online banking, it has a more stringent security system.

    Is Using a VPN Legal and Safe?

    Reporting from Bisnis.com, using a VPN is of course a legal action and does not violate the law. This is because it refers to the usefulness of a VPN, which is to make the internet connection private and secure.

    However, as previously explained. VPNs are also illegal and problematic when used to access networks to online banking or business email .

    Even so, each VPN service has different deficiencies and levels of security, so it can be said that whether it is safe or not depends on the type of VPN service you are using.

    Whether or not using a VPN is safe is due to two main factors, namely

    1. Legal Restrictions

    In using a VPN there are legal and policy restrictions that greatly affect the level of security. Every country where VPN servers are located has laws regarding implementing VPNs in their service.

    2. Technology Limitations

    Limited technology is also a safe factor in using a VPN. This is because VPN development also depends on the type of internet network protocol and encryption used.

    How to Use a VPN?

    VPN use is usually on smartphones and computers. For smartphones, you can use the VPN application available on the PlayStore . After you finish downloading the VPN application, you can have a VPN service available according to your needs.

    Meanwhile, for laptops, you can click the ” Network ” icon on the taskbar and select ” Network Settings “. After that, select VPN and click “ Add a VPN Connection ”. If you have added a VPN connection according to your needs, then you can access the internet as usual.

    Benefits of VPNs

    This VPN or Virtual Private Network actually has many benefits, you know… What are the benefits of using a VPN?

    1.Remote Access

    Through VPN you can do remote access. What is remote access ? Remote access is a permit process to access the internet through an office network, no matter where you are, as long as you are still connected to the internet.

    2. Secure Personal Information Anonymously

    A VPN can be useful for hiding your location directly when accessing the internet. This is so that not just anyone can find out where you are when accessing the internet. Through a VPN, the detected location is based on the location of the VPN server you are using.

    3. Device Information Encryption

    By using a VPN, it will be useful in the form that not everyone can easily identify the device along with the internet history that you are using.

    4. ByPass

    If you want to stream video on a site, usually there will be restrictions on accessing the site because it is considered dangerous. So, by using a VPN, you can bypass these geographic restrictions.

    5. Data Encrypted

    Previously, it was explained that the encryption process is the process of turning information into a secret code to obscure data sent, received or stored on the internet network.

    When there is an exchange of data with a web application using a VPN, your data will be encrypted. Through this encryption process, if someone sees what the computer is sending related to your information, what you see is only the encrypted data and the raw data.

    Advantages and Disadvantages of Using a VPN

    Everything certainly has advantages and disadvantages, as well as using a VPN in the process of accessing the internet network. So, what are the advantages and disadvantages of using a VPN?

    Let’s look at the following reviews!

    Pros of Using a VPN

    • Data is safer and confidential
    • The original IP identity is not directly known by others
    • Can access from different locations (countries) according to the chosen VPN service
    • Can access websites that have been blocked by the government or other organizations

    Disadvantages of Using a VPN

    • Internet connection becomes slower
    • Manual configuration becomes quite complicated
    • There are restrictions on its use
    • Internet connection becomes unstable

    The Right Time To Use A VPN

    When can you use a VPN service? The VPN service can be used while doing the following activities!

    • When using public WiFi . This is so that the internet network connection that you use becomes more secure.
    • When you’re trying to hide your activities from people who want to find out secretly.
    • While hiding the location. This could be if the site you want to go to turns out to have geo-blocked content or the content on the site is blocked because of a certain geographic area.
    • When you want to be anonymous within a certain website.
    • When you want to access a site that is blocked by the government or certain organizations.

    So, that’s an explanation about VPN and things related to VPN. Does Sinaumed’s often use VPN to access the internet network? If so , use it as needed Try not to harm other parties and don’t take illegal actions!

    Book Recommendations & Related Articles

  • What are the Properties of Solids? This Example and Full Explanation

    Properties of solid objects – In everyday life, Sinaumed’s certainly often encounters various kinds of objects with various forms. In everyday life, there are three forms of matter that can easily be found, namely liquid, gas and solid. Each form of matter, has the characteristics and symptoms of each.

    Because it has its own symptoms, Sinaumed’s needs to understand each of these forms. In this article, we will explain the properties of solids. Solids are the easiest form of matter to be found. For example plates, glasses, cutlery are solid objects.

    One of the most obvious properties of solids is that they have a fixed shape and size. Although in the end solid objects are able to turn into liquid or even with the act of change. In order to understand it more clearly, here is an explanation of the properties of solid objects.

    Definition of Solids

    Before discussing the properties of solid objects, it is better if Sinaumed’s understands the meaning of solid objects first.

    Solids in general are forms of matter that have a solid form with mass and occupy a certain space or volume.

    The most obvious property of a solid object is that it has a fixed shape and size, before finally being given an action to make a change. Solid objects also have a very strong attraction between molecules, so that the shape of a solid object can have a fixed volume with a large molecular density.

    If a solid object is placed in a container or a place, the shape of the object will remain as before and will not follow the shape of the container. Unless the solid object is given energy so that certain changes occur, either to liquid or gas.

    This, of course, is very different from the properties of liquids and gases whose form will change according to the shape of the container when placed in a particular container.

    It should be noted that solids and solids have different meanings.

    A solid is a material that has a shape and volume or the space occupied by a solid, liquid or gaseous substance. There are two main ways that solid particles can be arranged, namely by neatly arranged rows in an erratic arrangement.

    Where solids with particles arranged in neat regular rows are usually called crystals. Examples of crystals are ice, metals, diamonds and salt crystals.

    Examples of amorphous solids are wax, glass, rubber and plastics. Because the particles of amorphous solids are arranged very closely and stick together, the solid cannot be compressed easily and cannot be reduced by pressing on the object.

    Inside the solid, the individual particles will not move quickly to overcome the attractive forces between them and make the particles vibrate, but remain tightly bound inside.

    Properties of Solids

    From the explanation of the definition of solids above, of course, Sinaumed’s can already know some of the properties of solids which are the characteristics or characteristics of solid bodies. Here are some properties of solids that Sinaumed’s needs to know.

    1. Having a fixed shape 

    The nature of the first solid object can be seen from its shape. Solid objects will have a fixed shape, always the same under certain conditions, even though these solid objects are placed in certain containers with closed containers or placed in open spaces.

    The shape of the fixed solid object is affected by the density of the molecules present in it. So that solid objects can survive under certain conditions to be able to maintain a fixed shape.

    Its solid form will also require certain methods or processes to be able to change its shape. So that means, solid objects are difficult to experience changes in form naturally for certain solid materials. Examples include wood, iron, plastic, metal, iron and so on. To change the shape of the solid object, heat and heat energy is needed. However, there are also solid objects that change easily, such as ice cubes.

    2. The volume is fixed

    Apart from having a fixed shape, solids also have a fixed volume. This is influenced by its fixed shape, so that the mass of solid objects tends to remain the same. Because the volume is always fixed, solid objects will not change easily under certain conditions.

    The volume of a solid object will remain the same, even if the object is moved from one container to another. To change the volume of a solid object, a process or method is needed to be able to change the shape and form of the object, so that it can reduce or increase its volume. The result of these changes will also determine the volume of the fixed solid.

    3. Can be changed by using certain methods and processes

    Just like the nature of other objects, solid objects can change shape or form, from solid to gas or liquid.

    Even though the shape and volume of solid objects tend to be the same, solid objects can change shape or even form in certain ways and through certain processes.

    Examples include melting or sublimation which can change the shape or form of solid objects by going through several symptoms such as changes in color and changes in smell.

    Changing solid objects can undergo different processes or methods, so that it will require time and special tools. For example, turning wood into paper, chairs, cupboards or even tables takes time and a certain way.

    However, there are changes in solid objects that can change their shape easily. For example, like melting ice cubes or by placing camphor in an open room, the two objects will change shape over time.

    4. Has mass

    Every shape or form of an object, of course, has mass, including solid objects that have mass properties. This mass will then affect various kinds of solid objects in one’s daily life.

    For example, when there is a change in the shape or shape of a solid object, the mass of the solid object will also change. Sinaumed’s can prove that solid objects have mass when holding or carrying solid objects, some objects feel light but some feel heavy.

    If Sinaumed’s feels this, it means that the solid object has mass properties. Mass in solids, usually can be measured in grams, kilograms and so on. Examples include metal, wood, iron, sand, soil and other solid objects.

    5. Incompressible 

    There are some solids that are incompressible. So that means, the solid object is quite difficult to suppress because it has a density or molecular density.

    Some solid objects do not have cavities, thus making them difficult to compress, for example wood, iron, stone, or plastic.

    Even though there are some solid objects with softer properties, there will still be solid objects that are hard and difficult to compress or compress. So, naturally, if solid objects have a fixed shape or volume because the properties of solid objects are also difficult to compress.

    6. Can not flow

    Solids don’t flow like liquids. That is, even solid objects will not easily propagate easily. Solids cannot flow because they have a fixed shape and volume.

    This can affect the process of flow, because flowing is a process that can change the shape or volume of an object, namely liquid objects will tend to follow the shape of their container, such as water and other liquids.

    Characteristics of Solids

    In order to better understand the properties of solids, Sinaumed’s also needs to know the characteristics or characteristics of solids and changes in solids. Here’s a more detailed explanation.

    Based on the properties of solids that have been described previously, Sinaumed’s can certainly draw the conclusion that solids have characteristics that are easy to recognize. The following is a summary of the characteristics of a solid state that Sinaumed’s needs to know:

    1. The shape of solid objects cannot change even though solid objects have been moved from one container to another.
    2. The size of a solid object will not change even if the object is moved from one container to another.
    3. The volume of a solid remains constant and does not change under certain conditions.
    4. The density or density of solid objects tends to be relatively higher.

    Solid Change

    Just like the shape of other objects, the shape of solid objects can change, even though the shape and volume of solid objects are always the same. Changes in solid objects, can be in the form of changes in form or shape which can be followed by changes in color and smell of these solid objects. Therefore, any change in shape or form will definitely be followed by a change in the color and smell of the object.

    Changes in the form of solid objects will also occur naturally or physical and chemical changes. Changes in solid objects can then be identified from the process of change, for example, such as sublimation, freezing, searching which requires energy and heat in the process of changing its form.

    The following is an explanation of changes in solid objects accompanied by examples of changes in shape that are often encountered in everyday life:

    1. Changes in form

    Deformation is a change in solid objects into other solid objects and has a different shape. Changing the shape of a solid object into another solid object, still requires a special way to change it and will still change the structure of the molecules of the solid object.

    So, changes in shape in solid objects can occur through physical changes, as well as chemical changes that can replace the chemical elements present in these solid objects.

    Changes in the shape of solid objects chemically cannot restore the original shape of the solid before certain changes occur. Some examples of solid objects that change shape are as follows:

    a. Plastic

    This one solid object is a solid object with a relatively high density or molecular density with the properties of a flexible, slightly strong and slippery object.

    When plastic undergoes a heating process, these objects can turn into various forms of objects such as basins, buckets, chairs, plates, glasses and even cupboards.

    Plastic material is considered a material that is easy to find and has a fairly affordable price. Because of this, Sinaumed’s will easily find solid objects with a plastic base.

    b. Paper 

    Paper is a solid object resulting from changes in solid objects, namely from wood and then cooked to become pulp or pulp. The paper material will then undergo various kinds of filtering processes, until it is finally formed into paper that is usually used for writing and other needs.

    2. Changes in form

    Changes in form are changes that occur in solid objects where not only the shape changes, but the shape of the object also changes.

    The change in form, in the form of changing objects that originally had a solid form changed to another form, namely the form of gas or even liquid.

    Generally, changes in the state of a liquid can undergo a process of physical change that can be returned to its original form. Meanwhile, the chemical changes that occur change the chemical elements, so that the shape of solid objects cannot be returned to their original form.

    Here are some examples of changes in the shape of objects that Sinaumed’s needs to know about:

    Ice 

    Ice cubes are solid objects and have properties that quickly change even though they are solid objects. Ice has a fixed density and size under certain conditions.

    However, when exposed to energy or heat, it becomes very easy for ice cubes to change form to liquid by the process of changing.

    The ice cubes will change into water with different properties from the previous object, which is solid. The change in the state of ice cubes from solid to liquid is a physical change and does not experience a chemical change, because only its shape changes.

    Margarine and butter

    Margarine and butter are solid objects, although margarine and butter are soft. If these two objects undergo a heating process, their form will change from solid to liquid.

    When experiencing a change in form, margarine and butter do not experience changes in their chemical elements, so they enter into physical changes. The elements from which the solid is formed are still the same, when it has changed its form to a liquid.

    Camphor

    Camphor is a solid object that can change its form when placed in an open space. Mothballs that are left in an open room will turn into a gas due to the process of subliming into the air.

    This can happen due to changes in pressure, air temperature which can make the form of camphor change.

    The properties of camphor will also turn into a gaseous object which will follow the shape of the container or the influence of air from a certain room. The changes that occur in camphor are chemical changes due to changes in the chemical elements of camphor which mix with air to become gas.

    That is the explanation of the nature of solids. Sinaumed’s can learn more about this by reading related books that discuss the shape of objects. Hopefully all the discussion above is useful as well as add to your insight.

    As #FriendsWithoutLimits, sinaumedia.com provides a variety of useful and original books. Reading lots of books and articles will never hurt you, because Sinaumed’s will get #MoreWithReading information and knowledge.

    Author: Khansa

  • What Are the Impacts of Earth’s Revolution?

    Impact of Earth Revolution  – Sinaumed’s, do you know what Earth revolution is? Earth’s revolution is the movement of the earth around the sun. Not only does the earth revolve around the sun, but the planets in the solar system all revolve around the sun, only at different times.

    The solar system is a collection of celestial bodies that interact with each other and have a center, namely the sun. Each planet interacts with other celestial bodies or is called a satellite. If the planets revolve around the sun, the satellites also evolve, that is, they revolve around their respective planets.

    The earth around the sun has its own orbit, this orbit is an ellipse. Orbit is a fixed and regular path on an object that surrounds another object. In its revolution, the earth will not be able to go off track because each planet has its own orbit. The orbit is also one of the determinants of the length of time it takes to evolve. The farther from the sun, the longer it takes for the planet to evolve.

    In its revolution, the earth also causes impacts on life on earth. The resulting impacts include the change of seasons, the difference in the frequency of day and night, the formation of constellations, the apparent annual motion of the sun, and the existence of the Gregorian calendar. Here is the impact of the earth’s revolution.

    Impact of the Earth Revolution

    1. Change of Seasons

    This revolution of the earth has an impact with the change of seasons and differences in seasons in each part of the world. The northern and southern hemispheres have four seasons that change each year, namely spring, summer, autumn and winter. However, it is different in the hemisphere where the equator passes, in this part it only has two seasons, namely the dry season and the rainy season.

    The seasons change based on certain dates. The change of seasons in the northern and southern hemispheres has differences because of course the sun cannot illuminate all parts of the earth.

    From March 21 to June 21, the sun begins to appear to the north. The northern hemisphere gets more sunlight. At that time the northern hemisphere experienced spring. Meanwhile, the southern hemisphere gets less sunlight. At that time the area experienced autumn. Both occur at the same time, but the seasons are different.

    Then when it enters June 21 to September 23, the sun begins to be located in the northernmost part of the earth. Sunlight in the northern hemisphere is starting to increase. At that time the northern hemisphere was experiencing summer. Conversely, the sun, which begins to move to the northernmost part of the earth, makes the southern part of the earth get less sunlight. That’s when the southern hemisphere experiences winter.

    Then from September 23 to December 22, the sun returns to the equator towards the southern part of the earth. At this time the sunlight in the northern hemisphere begins to decrease. Then autumn occurs in the northern hemisphere. While the southern hemisphere gets more sunlight. At that time the southern hemisphere experienced spring.

    Finally, from December 22 to March 21, the sun is in the southernmost part of the earth and begins to move north. This causes the northern hemisphere to get less irradiation. At that time the northern hemisphere experienced winter. While the southern hemisphere gets more sunlight, then at that time the southern hemisphere experiences summer. This season continues to rotate into the following years.

    The following is a brief explanation of the changing seasons during the earth’s revolution.

    Northern Earth:

    • Spring (21 March – 21 June)
    • Summer (June 21 – September 23)
    • Autumn (September 23 – December 22)
    • Winter (22 December – 21 March)

    Southern Hemisphere:

    • Spring (September 23 – December 22)
    • Summer (22 December – 21 March)
    • Autumn (21 March – 21 June)
    • Winter (June 21 – September 23)

    2. Day and Night Time Frequency Differences

    The impact of this revolution of the earth makes a difference in the frequency of day and night. Day and night in the northern and southern parts of the earth will be different from the part of the earth at the equator. In the middle part of the earth or the equator, it has day and night which are evenly divided, 12 hours each.

    The combination of the revolution and the tilt of the earth’s axis causes natural phenomena at the time frequency of day and night. The more northerly the time frequency of day or night will feel longer, the southernmost part also feels that way.

    Between March 21 and September 23, the sun begins to move toward the north pole and away from the south pole. At this time the northern hemisphere receives more sunlight. This causes the frequency of time during the day in the northern hemisphere to be longer than in the southern hemisphere.

    From the equator the sun appears to move north by 23.5 degrees on June 21. Some areas of the northern hemisphere experience 24 hours of day, and some areas of the southern hemisphere experience 24 hours of night.

    Then between September 23 and March 21, the opposite occurred. Where the south polar region experiences more sunlight than the north pole.

    The frequency of daylight hours in the southern hemisphere is longer than that of the northern hemisphere. On December 22, the sun moves to the southernmost earth by 23.5 degrees. This causes the south pole to experience 24 hours of day, and the north pole to experience 24 hours of night.

    Then only on March 21 and September 23 the sun is at the same distance between the north pole and the south pole. The northern and southern hemispheres receive the same amount of sunlight. This results in the length of day and night in all countries being the same. At the equator the sun is directly overhead at this time.

    3. Annual Apparent Motion of the Sun

    This apparent annual motion of the sun is the backdrop for the changing seasons and the differences in the frequency of day and night that exist on Earth. All the phenomena that occur are due to the position of the sun which changes every month. This revolution of the earth that makes the position of the sun change.

    The part of the earth that gets more sunlight experiences day and summer. Likewise happens on the contrary, if the part of the earth that is not exposed to sunlight will experience night and winter. This will happen again and again every year.

    As seen in the picture above, the motion of the sun always occurs every three months. From March 21 to June 21, the sun is at the equator and begins to move towards the Tropic of Cancer (GBU) at 23.5 degrees. Then, from June 21 to September 23, the sun returns to the equator.

    From September 23 to December 22, the sun moves from the equator to the Tropic of Cancer (GBS) by 23.5 degrees. Then, from December 22 to March 21, the sun returns to the equator.

    Why can there be an annual apparent motion of the sun? This happens because the earth revolves around the sun or revolution, and rotates on its axis. Because the earth’s axis has a tilt of 23.5 degrees, each part of the earth has a difference in solar radiation.

    When observing this phenomenon continuously, it looks as if the sun is moving from north to south and vice versa to illuminate the earth. This is why it is called the annual apparent motion of the sun. The sun doesn’t really move, but because of the Earth’s revolution, the sun looks like it’s moving. The trajectory of the sun’s apparent motion is called the ecliptic.

    There are several terms related to the apparent annual motion of the sun, including solar declination, equinoxes and solstices .

    The sun’s declination is the angular distance between a celestial body and the celestial equator. The celestial equator is simply a projection of the earth’s equator onto the sky. It is assumed that the sky has a round shape like the earth.

    The sun’s declination changes periodically every day, it can increase or decrease. This declination increases and decreases by about 0.9856 degrees per day. Thus the time it takes for the sun to declinate from +23.5 degrees to -23.5 degrees occurs for 182.6211 days.

    Then the equinoxes are the equal length of time between day and night in all parts of the earth. For people who live on the equator, the frequency of days and nights is the same, which is 12 hours. But not for people who live in the northern and southern parts of the earth.

    For example, people who live in Europe experience long nights in winter, while people who live in Australia experience longer days in summer. Once entered at the time of the equinoxes , all parts of the earth have the same time frequency.

    Then the solstices if translated from Greek means the sun remains. It is called fixed because on certain dates the sun does not move much to the north or south. Usually the sun goes from +25.3 degrees to -23.5 degrees and back again to +23.5 degrees.

    Equinoxes and soltices occur twice a year, namely on March 21 and September 23 are called equinoxes , then June 21 and December 22 are called soltices .

    4. Formation of Constellations

    A constellation is a group of stars that form a certain pattern. Actually the constellations that we see are not close to each other. The location between one star and another is far apart, when we observe it from the earth it looks close together and is arranged in a pattern.

    Because of the earth’s revolution, the constellations in each part of the earth will look different. The northern part of the earth can only see the constellations in the north, the southern part of the earth can only see the constellations in the south, as well as the rest of the earth.

    According to the International Astronomical Union in 1992 there are 88 constellations. Some of the famous ones are Ursa Major, Ursa Minor, Orion, Scorpius, and Leo. Of course, these constellations have their own history.

    Are you interested in getting a deeper look at these mysterious stars ? This book reviews the use of stars and constellations in depth.

    5. There is a Gregorian calendar

    This Gregorian calendar was created because of the earth’s revolution. Based on the division of longitude, the limit of the international calendar is at 180 degrees. If in the eastern hemisphere 180 degrees is on the 6th, then in the western hemisphere 180 degrees is still the 5th, this incident seems to have jumped a day. The Gregorian calendar counts one year with 365.25 days.

    This Gregorian calendar was originally used by Julius Caesar or known as the Julian calendar. The Julian calendar is calculated based on the time interval between spring and the following spring in the northern hemisphere. This time interval is exactly 365 days, 5 hours, 48 ​​minutes, 46 seconds.

    In later calculations, Julius Caesar determined the calculation of the Gregorian calendar as follows:

    • There are 365 days in a year, and 24 hours in a day.
    • Since the 365 days are a quarter more days each year, it exceeds one day every four years to 366 days. The logic is like ¼ multiplied by 4 which results in 1. This year which has 366 days is called a leap year. Usually occurs in February.
    • To remember easily, leap years are years that are divisible by four, such as 2000, 2004, 2008, and so on.

    Conclusion Impact of Earth Revolution

    Earth makes revolutions without stopping. The earth makes revolutions in a long time, which is 365 days or it can be called a year. That is, the earth takes one rotation around the earth with 365 days, one rotation means a year.

    At the time of evolution, the earth continues to walk according to its orbit, this makes the earth’s position not always fixed. This results in an annual apparent motion of the sun where on March 21 the sun is at the equator, then on June 21 the sun is at the Tropic of Cancer (GBU) 23.5 degrees, then on September 23 it returns again at the equator, and on December 22 the sun is at the Tropic of Cancer (GBS) 23.5 degrees.

    From the daily apparent motion of the sun it also causes the change of seasons and the frequency of day and night. In the northern hemisphere, which is exposed to more sunlight, it will experience summer and longer daylight hours. Meanwhile, the southern hemisphere will experience winter and longer nights.

    This revolution of the earth also allows us to see different constellations every month. This constellation will also look different in other parts of the earth. The constellations in the northern hemisphere will be different from the southern hemisphere, as well as in other parts.

    With the earth’s revolution, we also know the Gregorian calendar. This Gregorian calendar is divided by 180 degrees. Between one part of the earth to another as if it would be a day different. The existence of this Gregorian calendar also makes us know that every four years there is a leap year, where in February there will be more than one day.

    Sinaumed’s, you already understand what the earth’s revolution is and its implications for life on earth. If you want to learn more about the solar system and its contents, you can buy books at sinaumedia.

    sinaumedia as #Friends Without Limits has provided useful and entertaining books for you to own. Come on, buy the book now!

    Author: Ricky Atthariq

    Book & Article Recommendations Related to the Impact of Earth’s Revolution

  • What are the FIFO, LIFO, FEFO and Average Methods? This is an explanation of the four methods

    FIFO, LIFO, FEFO Methods – Talking about business, maybe one of the things that is in your mind is an advantage. Yes, it is indeed one of the important components in a business. However, in order to make a profit, the availability of goods is also required.

    Therefore, business in any field requires a fairly good inventory system. Currently there are at least four systems for recording the availability of goods or stock of goods. The four inventory recording systems are the FIFO, LIFO, FEFO and Average methods.

    If Sinaumed’s is already involved in the business world, maybe FIFO, LIFO, FEFO and Average are familiar. However, there are some people who do not really understand some of these stock recording methods.

    You don’t need to worry about that, because this article will provide an explanation of FIFO, LIFO, FEFO and Average. Good for those of you who have been in the business world for a long time or are just about to start.

    It’s really mandatory to read the explanation in this article regarding the FIFO, LIFO, FEFO and Average methods that are applied to the inventory recording system.

    Understanding the FIFO, LIFO, FEFO and Average methods

    The previous explanation has mentioned a little about the FIFO, LIFO, FEFO and Average methods. These four methods are so important in recording inventory in the business world. Of course the FIFO, LIFO, FEFO and Average methods have different meanings.

    From this understanding, it is hoped that we can learn or know in general terms what the FIFO, LIFO, FEFO and Average methods actually are in the business world. Or should the business world have to use the FIFO, LIFO, FEFO and Average methods for the process of recording inventory.

    So maybe at first many were confused and didn’t really know the meaning of the FIFO, LIFO, FEFO and Average methods. Therefore, we start from understanding the meaning of the FIFO, LIFO, FEFO and Average methods.

    Definition of the FIFO Method

    First, there is the FIFO method, which is included in one way of recording inventory. FIFO also stands for First In First Out . Just as the FIFO method stands for, it is a system that makes an item that enters the first order must come out first as well.

    Simply put, the FIFO method is a system that requires that the first goods in must also be the first goods out. In the business world, the FIFO method is widely used in retail businesses.

    An example is businesses in the F&B or Food and Beverage sector such as food shops, cakes and even minimarkets. Of course, you are also aware that every product sold in these places has a short expiration date. Therefore, these items must be sold quickly.

    LIFO Method Definition

    Next there is the LIFO method which is also included in one of the methods of recording goods. The LIFO method is arguably the opposite of the FIFO method. LIFO stands for Last In First Out.

    Where this method will implement a system of selling goods that enter the last order will be sold in the very first order. Then for goods that have existed since the first will be sold at some time later. You could say the LIFO method is easier in the process of structuring goods.

    Interestingly, the LIFO method also provides its own advantages for business owners. This is because the LIFO method can save the process of spending taxes when inflation occurs. It should be noted that when inflation occurs, the profits will decrease but will not affect the profits from the operations carried out.

    An example is a business actor in the field of selling clothes. The process of selling clothes will be carried out as an ongoing trend. This means that even though the clothes that are in stock are in the last order. Still will be sold because market demand is rising.

    This will also increase the profits received by business actors selling these clothes.

    Then what about stock items that are not trending? So the action taken is to keep back in the warehouse and resell it when it’s a trend.

    Definition of the FEFO Method

    The FEFO method is also a method of recording goods. FEFO itself is an acronym for First Expired First Out. From this abbreviation it can have a broader meaning, namely goods or products that have the fastest expiration date will be sold first.

    In the FEFO method, business owners don’t need to think about the order in which goods are to be sold. However, business actors will pay attention to the expiration date of the product.

    So even though there are new products coming in, the expiration date is near. Then the product will be sold first. The existence of the FEFO method is claimed to be able to minimize losses from ongoing business.

    As an example is the sales system in pharmacies. Pharmacy business actors will sell drug products according to the expiration date. Drug products with the closest expiry date will be sold first.

    One of the ways used to apply the FEFO method to the pharmacy business is to place drug products that have the closest expiry date in the front of the window. The hope is that potential buyers will know about these drug products.

    Average method

    Compared to the three methods above, the Average method is quite complicated. The application of the Average method is to obtain the results of calculating unit costs in the inventory section.

    Then to get these results is done by dividing all the units in the warehouse by the availability of units to be sold. Later the results obtained are an average cost of the product to be sold.

    Now that’s an explanation related to the meaning of the FIFO, LIFO, FEFO and Average methods. The four methods have different meanings. In addition, each method also has its own advantages and functions. Then what method do you apply in your personal business?

    The advantages of the FIFO, LIFO, FEFO and Average Methods

    Now, after knowing the meaning of the FIFO, LIFO, FEFO and Average methods. Of course, it is incomplete if you only know what the FIFO, LIFO, FEFO and Average methods mean. You also need to know the advantages of some of these methods.

    Both the FIFO, LIFO, FEFO and Average methods always have their respective advantages. Of course, by understanding the advantages of each inventory method, you will also better understand the best inventory method to apply to the type of business that is being run.

    So that you understand more about the advantages of the FIFO, LIFO, FEFO and Average methods. The following is a complete explanation regarding this matter.

    The advantages of the FIFO method

    The first will start from the advantages of the FIFO method. Even if only a few points of excess. However, the explanation below will be quite helpful in knowing in outline what the FIFO method can provide when applied to the business side.

    1. The process of recording the goods report will be the same as the data on the goods in the warehouse.
    2. The FIFO method is also able to make HPP or cost of goods sold relatively low. However, in terms of gross profit, it will get quite high results.
    3. The FIFO method is also more profitable, logical and also claimed to be very reliable.
    4. The FIFO method is able to suppress the decline in the quality of goods.
    5. The process of applying the FIFO method is somewhat easier to understand.
    6. Financial reports with the application of the FIFO method will also minimize manipulation.

    Advantages of the LIFO Method

    After understanding what are the advantages of the FIFO method. So at this point we will proceed to explaining the advantages of applying the LIFO method to stock items. So that you will also understand more quickly, here is an explanation of the advantages of the LIFO method.

    1. The process of arranging goods with the LIFO method system will be easier.
    2. Spending in terms of taxes will be more controlled and also economical.
    3. The possibility of getting a profit could be greater. This is because the LIFO method takes advantage of what is trending at the same time.
    4. The process of comparing the amount of costs or costs with the income generated is somewhat easier.
    5. Even though there is a possibility of inflation, operating profit will not affect this condition.

    The advantages of the FEFO method

    This third point will provide an explanation of the advantages of the FEFO method. The FEFO method is also often applied in the business sector. Just like the two previous points, the FEFO method also has several advantages.

    1. The FEFO method is claimed to reduce the possibility of losses to the company.
    2. The existence of the FEFO method is also able to reduce the occurrence of storage of product stock that has passed its expiration date.’

    Advantages of the Average Method

    Finally, there is the Average method which also has its advantages. Although not as much as the advantages of the previous method. However, the Average method can also help the continuity of business processes. Below are some explanations related to the advantages of the Average method.

    1. The existence of the Average method will also make it easier to get the value of the goods inside without having to worry about the entry time.
    2. The company is able to provide goods or products in the warehouse without having to think about which one will enter first.

    Those are some of the advantages that some of these methods have. After knowing some of the advantages of the FIFO, LIFO, FEFO and Average methods, of course, it will also make it easier for you to choose the method of recording stock of goods in the business that you are in.

     

    Disadvantages of FIFO, LIFO, FEFO and Average methods

    Although the FIFO, LIFO, FEFO and Average methods have their respective advantages. But still a system also has drawbacks. So maybe some of you don’t really know what are the drawbacks of the FIFO, LIFO, FEFO and Average methods.

    The explanation below can help you to provide an explanation regarding some of the shortcomings of the FIFO, LIFO, FEFO and Average methods.

    Disadvantages of the FIFO Method

    The first explanation will start from the shortcomings of the FIFO method. Here is the explanation.

    1. The application of the FIFO method allows the payment of the tax burden by companies to the government to be somewhat higher.
    2. The FIFO method is indeed able to provide its own profit. However, the calculation and profit income are somewhat less accurate.
    3. The difference between the capital used for production and the profit generated is quite large.

    Disadvantages of the LIFO Method

    Next is about the disadvantages of the LIFO method. The following describes the disadvantages of the LIFO method.

    1. The process of recording goods is somewhat more complicated. This is because the LIFO method is more contradictory to the flow of goods in and out of storage.
    2. The LIFO method is somewhat more complicated, this makes the bookkeeping costs carried out higher.
    3. Although able to provide profit on sales. However, sales profit from the application of the LIFO method is relatively low.

    Disadvantages of the FEFO Method

    Next are the disadvantages of the FEFO method. Similar to the two previous methods, the FEFO method also has its own drawbacks. Below are some of the disadvantages of the FEFO method.

    1. It takes more time because every day you have to look for products with the fastest expiration dates among the hundreds or thousands of products that will be sold.
    2. The level of accuracy is higher because the items sold are more than tens.
    3. Requires more than one worker to apply the FEFO method to recording inventory.

    Disadvantages of the Average Method

    The last is the weakness of the Average method. Below is an explanation of the drawbacks of the Average method.

    1. Although it can generate profits from the sales process. However, the application of the Average method is only able to generate profits with small or few conditions.
    2. Compared to the previous three methods, the Average method is the most complicated at its level.

    So those are some of the drawbacks of the FIFO, LIFO, FEFO and Average methods. Although it has drawbacks in each method. But still, when viewed from the advantages provided. The FIFO, LIFO, FEFO and Average methods can still be used for inventory records.

     

    Examples of the Application of the FIFO, LIFO, FEFO and Average Methods

    After knowing the meaning, advantages and disadvantages of the FIFO, LIFO, FEFO and Average methods. It’s still not enough if you don’t know examples of applying the FIFO, LIFO, FEFO and Average methods in a business sector.

    Because not all business fields are suitable for using inventory recording systems such as the FIFO, LIFO, FEFO and Average methods. So that you are not even more curious about examples of applying the FIFO, LIFO, FEFO and Average methods. The following is an explanation of this.

    Example of the Application of the FIFO Method

    Food companies will usually implement a goods recording system using the FIFO method. An example is the sale of bread, of course you also know that bakery products have a very fast expiration date.

    Example of LIFO Method Application

    Most applications of the LIFO method are in the clothing sales business. However, some in the business of selling electronic goods and books also apply the LIFO method of inventory recording.

    Example of the Application of the FEFO Method

    Companies in the pharmaceutical sector are an example of the application of the FEFO method as a goods recording system. Then companies that sell food and beverages will also implement a goods recording system using the FEFO method.

    Example of the Application of the Average Method

    Then for an example of applying the Average method as a goods recording system is in a business sector that does not have an expiration date on its products. Some of them are companies that sell furniture, stationery, building materials and so on.

    Those are some explanations about the FIFO, LIFO, FEFO and Average methods. The explanation above can help you choose the method of recording the most suitable stock of goods for the field of business that is being carried out.

     

  • What are the Differences in Rights and Obligations? Here’s an example

    Differences in Rights and Obligations – In this world there are many things that are important and must be understood by every individual. One of the important things to understand is rights and obligations. Rights and obligations are two components that cannot be separated in this life. The reason is that these two terms are already attached to each other and are always associated with various aspects of life.

    Because these two things are attached to each other does not mean these two things have no differences. Rights and obligations have several main differences in them, these differences are tangible as rights are all things that refer to something that we get, while obligations are all things that refer to something that we have to do. The difference between rights and obligations is what makes these two things have an important function in people’s lives.

    Rights and obligations also have the potential to provide stability and strength to the community. Both of these also focus on developing the social awareness of each individual that they are social beings. This social awareness serves to create an individual right which is commonly called freedom.

    As for obligations, we usually equate obligations with responsibilities. This responsibility takes the form of our responsibility as citizens. The two brief definitions clearly state that there is a close relationship between rights and obligations.

    Before delving deeper into the differences between rights and obligations, it would be incomplete if we did not mention the definitions of these two things.

    What are Rights?

    To be able to distinguish between rights and obligations, of course we must first know and understand what those rights mean. Rights can be interpreted as an opportunity to be able to do and even have something we want.

    Rights can provide various potentials to an individual to make them aware of what they can/may do and what they cannot/may not do.

    Own rights exist in various aspects of life, such as in social life and within a cultural group. The creation of rights is also driven by several supporting factors such as social boundaries, ethics and even law.

    Talking about rights, a statement will immediately appear which states that rights are a universal tool that is attached to individuals from the moment they are born into the world.

    These universal tools apply to every individual regardless of their gender, religion, culture, ethnic group or nationality. Rights with the above characteristics are usually referred to as human rights, which can be abbreviated as HAM.

    Human rights or human rights are in the form of law that has great influence and applies to every human being or individual who lives without any discrimination of difference.

    It is one of the obligations of a state to be able to implement these human rights. Not without reason, human rights can have their own influence on creating a safe and peaceful atmosphere in a country. Own rights have several types of their own, such as:

    There are also types of rights according to their source, namely:

    1. Legal rights

    Rights that are based on and originate from existing laws, such as statutes, laws, regulations, legal files, and so on. Rights of this type have criteria that focus more on law or society.

    We can take examples, such as the right to express opinion, the right to speak (family), the right to love (family), the right to education, the right to equal treatment, the right to live properly, the right to defend the territory of the country, and so on.

    2. Moral rights

    In contrast to legal rights, moral rights are grounded and derived from the culture, principles or rules of an ethnic group. Moral rights have properties that tend to refer to an individual only. Moral rights usually take the form of communication between the creator and an individual to do good things according to his morals.

    Rights are believed to be the basis for creating the function and stability of a society that acts effectively. We can take an example, such as giving children a number of things, such as things to get an education, the right to be loved and cared for by both parents, and the right to be cared for until adulthood by both parents.

    Providing the above rights will certainly make children grow into good individuals in the future, because they get the opportunity to enjoy their rights as children. That way, the grown children will carry out their obligations well too.

    That’s the meaning of rights, after knowing the meaning and several types of rights, surely you will wonder what the obligations are? Because we have already touched on it when we were explaining the meaning and types of rights. So in the following we will convey, what does this right mean?

    What is Liability?

    The time has come to discuss the meaning of obligation. Obligations themselves can be interpreted as a necessity that must be carried out by an individual to do something in order to fulfill this obligation, the obligations themselves have several groupings in their implementation. These groupings, such as being grouped on legal, moral, out of necessity, because it is a mandatory duty of the individual, and so on.

    There are also types of obligations according to their sources, namely:

    1. Legal obligations

    Legal obligations are in the form of responsibilities that are already bound by existing law. Every individual in a country is bound by legal obligations in force in that country, these obligations are called legal obligations. Legal obligations make an individual subject to sanctions if they do not carry out these obligations

    2. Moral obligation

    Moral obligations have the nature that must be done but are not bound by any law. So if an individual does not carry out these obligations, then he will not get any sanctions. But the individual will only feel bad, reluctant and so on. Moral obligations are obligations that exist in society that are carried out in accordance with existing conditions.

    For example, respecting elders and caring for and caring for our own parents when they are old is not a legal obligation. There has not even been any law urging an individual to do either of these things. These two things must be done because these two things have entered into the realm of an individual’s moral obligations. As stated earlier, obligations and rights both play an important role in social life.

    It would be inappropriate if an individual only competed for rights without fulfilling the obligations they had to carry out. Individuals who have a personality like this will certainly be the source of the impression and impact that has a negative value. Therefore, it becomes a necessity for an individual to be aware of the fact that like other individuals, before enjoying the sweetness

    their rights, they also have to carry out and complete their obligations both to other individuals and to a certain aspect.
    After knowing the meaning of rights and obligations, now is the time for us to discuss the differences between the two.

    Differences in Rights and Obligations

    There are several differences between rights and obligations from various aspects, here are the differences.

    1. Meaning of Rights and Obligations

    Right is an opportunity/ability of an individual to do or even get something. Whereas human rights are a privilege that is inherent in an individual from the moment they are born into the world, these rights are given to all people through government organizations in that country.

    Obligation is a necessity that must be done by an individual to fulfill the individual’s obligation/duty. it is the responsibility of each individual to carry out and fulfill their obligations. This responsibility is given by government organizations to each individual who is a citizen of that country.

    2. Function of Rights and Obligations

    – The right to function to be owned or obtained by all individuals.
    – Duties serve as a form of responsibility for an individual and they must fulfill them to obtain their rights.

    3. For whom

    – Right to self.
    – Obligations are for oneself and mostly for other people or groups.

    4. Community Relations

    – Rights are things that individuals get from their environment (the surrounding community)
    – Obligations are things that individuals do for their environment (the surrounding community)

    5. Provisions

    – Rights have the potential to be defended or even challenged by courts dealing with them.
    – The obligations of a citizen are not challenged by the court dealing with them.

    6. Anvil

    – Rights are based on all the rights granted to an individual.
    – Obligations are based on the performance of an individual in carrying out and fulfilling his duties and responsibilities.

    The right becomes a social, ethical or legal principle of the freedom of an individual to regulate himself, while the obligation is an individual’s responsibility to oblige himself to carry out and fulfill his duties. Rights and obligations are very close, so if we do not fulfill our obligations, we will not get our rights.

    We can interpret rights as normative rules that are owned by society and determined by existing legal jurisdictions. Every individual is legally obliged to get their rights, there is no limit why an individual cannot get their rights. Rights are usually written in law, so that people will easily oppose and defend these rights in court.

    Own rights are based on a collection of actions and responsibilities that have been agreed upon and become the hope of creating mutual respect and mutual cooperation behavior. Rights are not just a form of individual freedom to do and get what they want. Instead, rights are a foundation or foundation in improving people’s performance in describing their identity. It is with this increase that we can give birth to a society with our current culture.

    The other foundation or foundation is an obligation, because before getting a right, a person must carry out his obligations. This obligation usually takes the form of duties assigned to an individual. Assignments are usually given a deadline known as “due date” with this deadline making it appear as if the individual working on the assignment has a debt to the assignor. Completing tasks according to the deadline is considered important to protect these individual rights.

    The most important difference between rights and obligations is that rights are based on privileges that have been given to an individual since they were born into the world while obligations are given to individuals on the basis of the ability to carry out these obligations. it is a must to fulfill these obligations in order to obtain their rights as well.

    Individuals can get privileges when they have successfully fulfilled their obligations and we have alluded to these rights during this discussion. But you know what? It turns out that there are several characteristics of its own to be able to call a right a privilege. Here are the characteristics.

    – Privileges are rights that other people have granted you.
    – Privileges are usually owned by certain people and other people do not have these rights. We can take examples such as people who have the potential to continue their studies to tertiary institutions for free, while other people have to pay to continue their studies.
    – Privileges have the potential and are prone to become the subject of debate and disputes between individuals. We can take an example such as the privilege of an individual in treating his health for free.
    – Privileges have the potential to cause envy to other individuals who carry out their obligations but receive different rights.

    To be clear about the difference between rights and privileges. In the following, we will discuss the meaning of ordinary rights and privileges owned by an individual.

    – Rights are things that have been branded as owned by each individual and are believed by all individuals as the nature and form of quality benchmarks of an individual carrying out an obligation that they carry, including passive and negative obligations to other individuals.
    – Privileges are rights that an individual asks for after carrying out a special obligation or can also be given free of charge to that individual with the intention of being a form of assistance given to individuals who have fulfilled active or positive obligations from individuals who provide these obligations.

    Most people tend to see themselves as having rights and duties. This tendency has reached the point where they feel powerful and have all the rights over everything that exists. Whereas in the eyes of other individuals, they only have all the obligations that must be done and completed. With a mindset like this can raise the potential for what their behavior and actions will be like in the future.

    Meanwhile, we are all individuals who carry out the same obligations and receive the same rights, only the portion differs according to the abilities of each individual. Most individuals only focus on one concern and other concerns will be ignored.

    In essence, the difference between these two things, rights and obligations is that as we know rights are given to other individuals in order to maintain the basic freedoms and freedoms of these individuals, while for obligations to individuals who are judged to be able to complete these obligations to obtain these rights. their rights. Abuse of authority in assigning obligations and awarding rights to other individuals can cause confusion between individuals. Therefore, the giver of the obligation must really use his power appropriately so that there is no gap between individuals.

    So, those are some explanations about the difference between rights and obligations. Besides that, we have also provided several explanations regarding other types of rights, namely privileges and how the process of these privileges is formed. We also describe some of the problems caused by improper distribution of rights and duties. Hope this article helps!

  • What are the characteristics of the planet Mars? This is the full explanation

    Characteristics of the Planet Mars – Is Sinaumed’s interested in celestial bodies or outer space? That’s right, our universe is indeed very broad and very interesting to study, including about the planet Mars which is considered the most similar to earth. By now, we must be familiar with the planet Mars, because there has been a lot of news circulating about discoveries on the planet Mars. Based on research, the planet Mars is also often visible from Earth.

    In fact, there has been a lot of news that the planet Mars will be used as a replacement planet for Earth, if in the course of time it is no longer habitable. The issue may not be completely true and also not completely wrong. In order to better understand it, Sinaumed’s needs to get to know the planet Mars, from the characteristics and facts of discoveries on that planet.

    Get to know the Planet Mars

    Mars is the fourth closest planet to the Sun. Seen from Earth, this planet looks like a red star. This planet is called the Red Planet because the surface of Mars contains iron oxide. The planet’s name comes from the Roman god of war.

    The diameter of this planet is 6,780 kilometers, which is about half the diameter of Earth. The average distance from the Sun to Mars is 228 million kilometers or 1.5 AU. At the speed of light 300,000 km/s, it takes about 13 minutes for the sun to reach Mars.

    Due to Mars’ elliptical orbit, this planet may be both the closest and the farthest from the Sun. The closest distance from Mars to the Sun is 206.6 million kilometers. The farthest distance from Mars to the Sun is 248.2 million kilometers.

    Mars takes 687 days in one orbit around the Sun (Mars Revolution). Mars not only revolves around the Sun, but also around or around its own axis. This planet takes 24.6 hours to rotate. Not much different from Earth, which takes 23.9 hours to rotate. Mars’ axis of rotation is also tilted 25° to its orbital plane. Consequently, Mars has many seasons. Seasons on Mars that last longer than Earth are due to its orbit being larger than Earth’s.

    Mars is a terrestrial planet, like Mercury, Venus and Earth. The diameter of Mars is half that of Earth, but its surface is almost as large as the land on Earth. Because 2/3 of the earth’s surface is sea. Mars is home to Mount Olympus, the highest mountain in the solar system. The height of this mountain is about 21 km, which is about three times that of Everest, which is the highest mountain on the planet.

    Mars has a thin atmosphere consisting of carbon dioxide, nitrogen and argon gases. The maximum temperature on the surface of Mars is only 20 degrees Celsius, and the minimum temperature can reach 153 degrees Celsius.

    Mars has two moons, Phobos and Deimos. Phobos and Deimos are considered asteroids because of their irregular shapes. Phobos and Deimos are 9,377 km and 23,460 km from Mars, respectively. In 50 million years, Phobos is expected to collide around Mars to form a ring.

    Dozens of space probes have been sent to Mars from the Soviet Union, the United States, several European countries and Japan to study the planet’s surface, climate and geology. About two-thirds of spacecraft aimed at Mars fail in their mission.

    Mission failures are usually caused by technical problems such as, failure or loss of communications or spacecraft design flaws. Mars has two permanent polar caps.

    Water ice found at the poles of Mars is buried in layers of frozen dust and carbon dioxide. Scientists did not expect to find creatures currently thriving on Mars. Instead, they are looking for signs of life since Mars was still warm and covered in water.

    Characteristics of the Planet Mars

    After getting to know briefly about the planet Mars, we can recognize it more broadly from the characteristics of the planet Mars that have been proven to be discovered. The following are the characteristics of the planet Mars that distinguish it from other planets in space:

    1. The name Mars has existed since Roman times

    Mars seems to have been known for a long time. This planet was named by the Romans. Mars, according to ancient Roman beliefs, is the name of the god of war. The name cannot be separated from the reddish color of Mars. It reminded the ancient Romans of “blood” (war). Besides the ancient Romans, the ancient Egyptians also named this planet “Deshernya” which means “red”.

    2. Called the Red Planet

    As previously mentioned, Mars was originally named for its reddish color. The red color seen on the parent planets Phobos and Deimos is caused by the oxidation (rusting) of iron minerals within and on the surface, creating a red appearance when viewed from a distance. As quoted from space.com, the reddish color process on Mars has existed for 4.5 billion years, consistent with the formation of our solar system.

    At this time (the solar system was created), the planets then also formed. It brought iron ore mainly from the formation of the solar system. Due to the meteorite impact and gravity, the iron mineral sank to the center of the planets, including Earth. But uniquely, the Martian iron remains on the surface until it oxidizes and rusts.

    3. Being the Second Smallest Planet in the Solar System

    Mars is only bigger than Mercury, according to Spiff.rit.edu mars is the second smallest planet after Mercury. The diameter of the planet next to us is about 6779 kilometers. Mars is 50 percent smaller than Earth. However, this planet also has a size difference between the poles and the equator. This is inseparable from the rotation process. The polar diameter of Mars is about 6,752 kilometers. At the equator, the “red” diameter is about 6,794 kilometers.

    4. It has the highest mountain in the solar system

    The planet Mars has the highest mountains in the solar system. Most of us need to know that the highest mountain on earth is on the border between Nepal and China and is Everest at 8,849 meters above sea level.

    However, Everest is not that high compared to the highest mountain on Mars. This red planet has the highest mountain in the solar system, named Olympus. Quoting from boombastis.com, Olympus is three times higher than Everest. Also, the height of Mount Olympus exceeds the depth of the Mariana Trench, the deepest trench on the planet.

    5. The Period of Rotation and Tilt of the Axis Like the Earth

    Mars’ rotation period is not much different from Earth’s rotation period. If a day on Earth lasts 24 hours, then a day on the Red Planet lasts 24.6 hours. Even if we moved to this planet, we wouldn’t be too surprised by the time we spend there each day. Mars has a tilt angle or tilt angle that is almost the same as Earth, as well as the duration of its rotation. Mars’ tilt angle is 25 degrees compared to Earth, which has a tilt of 23.4 degrees.

    6. Mars Has a Longer Orbit Period than Earth

    The orbit of the planet mars is one year longer than that of Earth, that is, one year on Mars is 687 days or 1.88 years. The duration of revolution on the Red Planet is inseparable from the distance from the Sun and the distance around the Sun which is longer than Earth. Earth’s distance from the Sun is about 105 million kilometers, while Mars is about 228 million kilometers from the Sun.

    Despite its long orbital period, this planet near the asteroid belt has the same number of seasons as Earth (subtropical), but with very long seasons. Quoting from mars.nasa.gov, winter on Earth lasts about 89 days, while winter on Mars can last for 154 days or about 5 months.

    7. Distance Close to Earth

    As already mentioned, the planet Mars is a neighbor of Earth. When Sinaumed’s heard the word “neighbor”, he had to keep his distance. At about 56 million kilometers, this planet is the closest planet to Earth. Looks close, but the distance to land on Mars is very far. Quoting from image.gsfc.nasa.gov, the travel time from Earth to Mars is about 260 days. It also depends on the speed at which the rocket reaches the “red planet”.

    8. Thin Atmosphere

    The next characteristics of the planet !Ars are the elements of the atmosphere. One of the obstacles to human movement to Mars is the planet’s very thin atmosphere. Atmosphere is one of the supporting elements of life. The thickness of the atmosphere in “The Reds” is currently less than 1 percent of Earth’s atmosphere. As quoted from scienceefocus.com, solar storms have been the cause of the loss of Mars’ magnetic field for hundreds of millions of years. When the magnetic field is lost, the red planet loses its ability to hold on to its atmosphere. As a result, Mars has a cold, dry climate and no oxygen.

    9. Surface of Mars

    The most visible characteristics of the planet Mars are from the shape of the planet’s surface. Mars is known as a rocky “terrestrial” planet and is very similar to Earth. Mars is characterized by a dry, dusty and rocky surface.

    The southern half of Mars is much rougher and also has more craters and extreme plateaus. In the northern reaches of Mars, there are smooth depressions that look like dry lakes or meandering river beds.

    This difference in surface properties is known as the Mars dichotomy. Impact craters are part of a dichotomy, and planetary scientists suspect that long-lost seas and lakes explain the intricacies of some regions.

    The movement of the old melting glaciers may have created interesting terrain elsewhere. At both poles, there is ice that grows and shrinks with the changing seasons.

    10. Temperature and Atmosphere

    Apart from the shape of the surface, the characteristics of the planet Mars can also be identified from its temperature and atmosphere. The atmosphere on Mars is very thin and consists mostly of carbon dioxide (95%) and nitrogen, argon, oxygen and other gases.

    The atmospheric pressure is about one hundredth of that of the earth. Mars has an extreme range of day and night temperatures due to its thin atmosphere. The temperature of Mars never exceeds 20 ° C.

    Mars cannot retain heat energy. The average temperature on Mars is minus 60 degrees Celsius. In winter, temperatures near the poles can drop to minus 125 degrees Celsius. Summer on Mars can be as low as 20 degrees Celsius near the equator, but at night it can drop to minus 73 degrees Celsius.

    11. Seasons of Mars Like Earth

    Mars has four seasons. This is because the planet is tilted on its axis. The length of the seasons depends on the sun’s orbit on Mars. In the Northern Hemisphere, spring is the longest season at seven months. Summer and autumn are about 6 months.

    Winter lasts only four months. During a Martian summer, the polar cap, which is mostly composed of carbon dioxide ice, can shrink and disappear completely. In winter, the ice sheet will return to its original form.

    12. Satellite

    The characteristics of the planet Mars can be seen from the satellite. Mars is orbited by two moons, Phobos and Deimos. Both Phobos and Deimos appear to be covered in dust and loose rock, with the carbon-rich rock mixed with ice. Both of these satellites are smaller than the Moon and have an irregular shape.

    It is unclear how Phobos and Deimos were born. According to NASA, most scientists believe that the gravity of the red planet has pushed them into orbit past the moon, because they have a similar composition to asteroids found elsewhere in the solar system.

    So, that’s an explanation of the characteristics of the planet Mars that Sinaumed’s can recognize to differentiate it from other planets. Space studies always depend on the times, that is, it always develops with new discoveries.

    That’s what makes studying the universe interesting. If sinaumedia is interested in learning about celestial bodies and other space studies, you can visit sinaumedia’s book collection at www.sinaumedia.com , such as the following book recommendations:

    The book above can be used as a complete reference for teachers, lecturers, or students and students, for example conducting research or getting to know outer space in a basic way. This includes reviewing the characteristics of the planet Mars and other planets based on official discoveries by the parties concerned. Readers are prepared to be amazed by the space knowledge in this book.

    If we usually read the atlas of the earth, then Sinaumed’s can read this book to get to know the solar system in detail. This book contains explanations from the solar system to planets, everything about supernovas, and stars. This Space Atlas will invite readers to explore the amazing universe.

    Readers will be invited to travel around the solar system and explore the stars in this book. This book discusses more than seventy stunning illustrations of space objects, including planets. This book provides an interesting read with clear explanations of the latest and greatest discoveries in the study of astronomy, including dark matter and the shape of the surface of the planet Mars.

    This book also contains a sequence of historical events from the discovery of astronomy, including the history of the universe and where we live now, namely planet earth. Readers will also find tips on how to observe the stars, including showing how and where to observe the amazing sights of space. For those who are fans of the study of astronomy, this book is a treasure.

    In addition to the theoretical study of astronomy and space, Sinaumed’s can also find books on space for children. Usually children like to learn things that are proposed, including about the universe.

    Those are recommendations for books that Sinaumed’s can read to increase his knowledge about astronomy and space. If Sinaumed’s wants to find other interesting books, Sinaumed’s can visit www.sinaumedia.com to get the best readings.

  • What are Proxies? Types, Benefits, Strengths and Weaknesses

    What are Proxies? – The internet is one of the most important things nowadays, with the internet we can do many things. Starting from looking for information, contacting someone, looking for various entertainment, many people cannot even be separated from the internet because their job requires them to stay online all the time. But the existence of the internet is also often misused by certain people.

    Not once or twice, we hear about various cases of crimes committed by other people on the internet. One of the most frequent cases is the case of data theft. Usually, data theft is carried out by certain streams of hackers, then this data is used for bad things such as cases of fraud or extortion.

    To anticipate this kind of crime, of course we need protection. Considering that these crimes occur in cyberspace, the protection we need is clearly different from the real world.

    In fact, there are many ways we can protect ourselves from crime in cyberspace, one of which is by using a proxy. The question is, what is a proxy? For people working in the IT world, proxies are not something foreign to their ears.

    But for ordinary people, the term proxy is something new and difficult to understand, even if the browser they use every day uses any type of proxy, they still won’t realize it.

    If you are one of those people who are fairly new to proxies, and are curious to learn about them, you are now reading the right article. Here, we will talk about proxies. Not only answering the question, “What is a proxy?”, but complete with various types of proxies, as well as the function of using a proxy for you. Here’s the full explanation!

    What are proxies?

    Before discussing the benefits and types of proxies, we will start by discussing the most basic thing first, namely the definition of proxies. A proxy is a server that acts as a link between the internet and a computer.

    In simple terms, when we go online and do a search, our command will reach the proxy, then the proxy will forward our request to another server on the internet. After getting an answer from a server on the internet, the proxy will forward the answer from the search results and display the answer on our computer screen.

    Proxy types

    Although their main purpose is to connect computers and internet servers, proxies are not just one type. For those of you who don’t know, proxies are divided into four types. Of course, each type of proxy is not the same, and has a different way of working and level of security. So what’s the difference between one proxy and another? Here’s an explanation!

    1. Transparent proxies

    The first type of proxy is a transparent proxy. Transparent proxy itself is a proxy that forwards our requests to servers on the internet without telling information about the device we are using. In a way, transparent proxies are the most common type of proxy, and are usually used on computers in offices.

    The minus of this proxy is, even though they don’t leak our IP to other servers, they are less secure because they don’t encrypt the data we have. If there is an intrusion, our data and various personal information will be easily read by unwanted people.

    2. Anonymous proxies

    The second type of proxy is an anonymous proxy. A level stronger than a transparent proxy, an anonymous proxy is a type of proxy that will tell the user’s internet protocol or proxy IP to a server on the internet without telling the user’s actual private IP. So when you surf in cyberspace, servers on the internet will not know your private IP. Instead, servers on the internet will only identify you as a proxy.

    3. Distorting proxies

    Distorting proxies at first glance are similar to anonymous proxies, what makes them different is that this one proxy will provide fake IP addresses to servers on the internet. If you use a distorting proxy, you can change some information about the device you are using, including providing a fake location or a location that is different from your actual location.

    The advantage of this proxy is that you can freely access blocked content in an area without any problems. Of course, you shouldn’t use this opportunity to do negative things that can harm anyone, including yourself.

    4. High anonymity proxies

    Among all proxies, high anonymity proxy is the most secure type of proxy and is recommended for use by everyone who works with the internet. By using this type of high anonymity proxy, the server will not only be unable to get your private IP, but also your proxy IP.

    Instead, the server will only find a random IP that acts as a client. This type of proxy is well encrypted, and more difficult for others to track, including even malicious hackers.

    Benefits of using proxies

    At the beginning it was explained that a proxy is a link between us and a server on the internet. But being a link is not the only thing a proxy server can do. For those of you who don’t know, using a proxy also gives us some quite beneficial benefits, what kind of benefits?

    1. Maintain user security in cyberspace

    Apart from acting as a liaison, a proxy also functions as a protector between us and the internet network. So after our gadget goes online and gets internet protocol or IP, the server or ISP can easily get information about the device we are using.

    Starting from the type of device, some personal information, even worse, the server can track our current location. You certainly don’t want your location to be tracked by strangers, do you? To avoid this terrible thing, one way is to use a proxy.

    Proxies will secure our private computer network by hiding private IP addresses, so that the public network cannot get information from the device we are using at that time.

    2. Access blocked websites

    We can access not all websites in this world. Some are hidden by users, some are unreachable due to geographical location, or it could be because they are blocked by the local government. For example, you are in a country, and you want to access social media.

    Unfortunately the country blocks the social media that we use, so you can’t access it. By using a proxy, you can stay online on social media and access your accounts. To open access, you can use a distorting proxy.

    As previously discussed, with this proxy not only is our IP hidden, but we can also change the actual location, and provide a fake location as if you were not in that country’s territory.

    4. Traffic monitoring

    By using a proxy, you can monitor internet users in a place and see what they are doing with their computers. Usually this is applied in schools or companies to find out employee activities when using a company or school’s computer.

    By using a proxy, a computer user who opens a prohibited website can easily be found out and prosecuted by the party concerned.

    5. Block certain sites

    Apart from giving access to blocked sites, and monitoring what other people are doing, proxies can also block certain sites by using filtering features. With this feature, you can block websites that you think are dangerous to access. Parents can protect their children by blocking websites deemed inappropriate for children. In addition, the filtering feature of this proxy is also sometimes used by companies to ensure that their employees cannot access certain websites with the company’s internet network.

    6. Improve internet performance for the better

    Apart from being able to protect private IP, block or provide access to certain websites, the existence of a proxy can actually make our internet performance better than before. This is because the proxy will save bandwidth from the user’s internet connection. With these savings, internet performance will be better which automatically also makes our internet access faster.

    Disadvantages and Advantages of using a proxy

    Like two different sides of a coin, proxies also have many advantages. But those advantages do not mean the proxy is a perfect server. Proxy servers in fact also have some drawbacks. For those of you who are interested in using a proxy, you must first know the advantages and disadvantages of a proxy before using it!

    Pros of using proxies

    One of the main advantages of using a proxy is that you will be protected from hacking threats. Some proxies will hide your real IP address so that people will find it difficult to access your computer. Not only are you protected from bad people, you will also be protected from dangerous websites such as sites designed by hackers, or sites that can secretly invite viruses to enter your computer.

    Finally, proxies also store all the information you need through cache. As a result, when you open a website that you have visited before, the website will appear faster on the computer monitor screen. Very interesting isn’t it?

    Disadvantages of using proxies

    1. Proxies are vulnerable to cyber attacks

    Proxies can indeed protect our computers from light hacking, but proxies will not be able to survive if our computers get complex and sophisticated cyber attacks. This is because some proxies don’t have encryption. Plus, the majority of proxies still use SSL certificates to encrypt data. As a result, when SSL encryption is executed, the data we have becomes vulnerable to attack.

    2. Easy to trace their whereabouts

    Proxies store almost all device information that we use. That information includes your password, location, phone number, and even your home address. Actually, this information will remain safe, provided that the proxy is not infiltrated by the provider.

    If that happens, your personal information is obviously under serious threat. These intruders can easily steal all personal information in the cache data, and misuse it to commit various crimes such as fraud.

    3. Not always compatible with the network

    Proxies can indeed be the best choice for protecting your personal information. The problem is, not all proxies can be used for your computer network. One of the reasons, because the network and proxies have their own configuration.

    When the proxy used is not compatible or does not match the network you have, there are only two solutions. First, you can look for other types of proxies that suit your network, or you can configure yourself to suit both.

    4. The user must first configure the code

    As previously explained, sometimes we have to configure ourselves by writing some code so that the proxy is compatible with the network we have. For those who are used to it, this is definitely not a problem. But for those who are new to it, configuring the code is quite a challenge.

    The reason is, they have to write the code as perfect as possible. The more perfect the code you write, the better. This is done to prevent hackers from entering and stealing your personal data. The problem is not everyone has this ability right?

    The risks of using proxies

    With the various benefits above, using a proxy looks like the right choice. But like all things, using a proxy also comes with risks that must be borne by the user. So what are the risks? Let’s find out together!

    1.Proxies secretly record all the activities we do

    Proxies do hide our activity and private IP address from outside servers. But secretly, they also record all of our activities, including various personal information that we have typed on the internet. On the positive side, you can access a website more quickly.

    On the downside, your personal data is a bit vulnerable. Indeed, the possibility of your data being stolen is very minimal, but still the possibility of criminal acts such as cyber attacks or data theft will always exist.

    2. Not all proxies do encryption

    Apart from only using SSL certificates for data encryption, certain proxies, such as transparent proxies, don’t even do encryption at all. For those of you who don’t know, encryption is the process of scrambling data and turning it into a series of secret codes that can only be understood by people who do have access to read them.

    The absence of encryption makes it very easy for third parties or hackers to read our information. This is certainly very dangerous right? So make sure you choose the best type of proxy to ensure the security of your personal data.

    So that’s an explanation about proxies, types of proxies, as well as their benefits for users. With a number of benefits and advantages, using a proxy can indeed be a good choice to protect all of our data from bad people. But that doesn’t mean you can choose a proxy carelessly.

    If you have read the explanation about proxies and their types, you will know that there are several types of proxies, and all types work in different ways. So make sure you choose a strong and secure type of proxy, you also have to make sure that the proxy you choose is compatible with your computer network.

    For Sinaumed’s who want to learn all about proxies, you can really visit www.sinaumedia.com . Here, you can get various books about proxies and other sciences. As #FriendsWithoutLimits, we always try to provide the best and latest information for you.

    Author: Siti Marliah

    Book Recommendations & Related Articles

  • What are NFTs? Highly Profitable Future Digital Assets

    What are NFTs? – Investment nowadays is getting more interesting, there are lots of new investment assets that have sprung up, one of which is the Non-Fungible Token asset or commonly known as the NFT. The presence of NFT itself has attracted a lot of attention from various groups of people in Indonesia, such as big investors, crypto lovers, art collectors, and even game fans.

    NFT is basically a digital asset that is in a blockchain technology network. Recently, NFT has been hotly discussed in the crypto world, this is because NFT has succeeded in providing very high profits to artists, creators, musicians, and influencers. Their work, which had previously been converted into digital assets, succeeded in getting investors interested and they did not hesitate to buy these assets in the form of NFTs at very fantastic prices.

    In short, NFT can be understood as a piece of digital asset content related to the blockchain. NFT itself is the latest innovation of maximizing the use of blockchain networks on ethereum and bitcoin and others. This is the main reason why NFTs can be worth up to tens of millions of US dollars. So, to understand more about NFTs and how they differ from other crypto assets, here is an explanation about NFTs and other crypto assets.

    A. Know Non-Fungible Token (NFT)

    The increasing popularity of various game industries and digital artworks has given rise to many new innovations in the world of technology. This is also supported by the increasing number of people connected by using the internet. Some of the progress that has been successfully achieved has resulted in a lot of data spreading that is getting out of control, one of which is the distribution and transaction of digital assets.

    When plunging into cyberspace, sometimes many people feel confused in determining which is the original work and which is the result of duplication or duplication. Although many people can easily plagiarize works of art on the internet, works that have been produced in digital form can have intellectual property that will be protected. In overcoming this problem, Non-Fungible Token is present as a digital token or crypto asset that is founded on a blockchain technology network.

    The keyword in the name NFT itself is Non-Fungible, the two words come from the terms Fungible and Token. Fungible can be interpreted as an asset’s ability to be exchanged with similar assets that have the same value. This can be analogized to when someone wants to exchange a Rp. 100,000 banknote for five banknotes worth Rp. 50,000. So the two banknotes in concept have the same value. Meanwhile, a token can be interpreted as a digital asset that can be used to represent goods, services, to various objects that have value.

    In simple terms, NFT has almost the same function as a certificate of authenticity that is exclusively owned by someone in the real world. Information on these assets will also be shown about who the initial owner, final owner, to the issuer of the token or digital asset are. NFT assets have a different form from Bitcoin or other crypto assets, this type of crypto asset can be classified as a unique asset because each NFT has a different value according to the value given by the buyer. This uniqueness ultimately makes NFTs unable to be exchanged with other cryptocurrencies.

    In 2017, many people began to recognize NFT due to the release of an NFT game called Crypto Kitties. Crypto Kitties is the first game to stand on the Ethereum blockchain network. By using the Crypto Kitties game, users can adopt, raise, and trade cats digitally or virtually. After that success, starting at the end of January 2021, NFTs are back in popularity and can grow so fast that they are able to attract many people into the world of crypto.

    In 2021 until now, NFT has grown very rapidly and has become a medium for many people’s digital collections. NFT has succeeded in becoming a new solution or method that can support artists, such as artists, musicians, and athletes. With the development of blockchain with NFT, artists no longer need to market their works through third parties. Even though it is already very popular in the community, NFT is still very limited for a number of industries such as arts, hobbies, and entertainment.

    NFT can be said to be an asset that has enormous potential in the future. As an asset that develops from the cryptocurrency system, NFT has a purpose, form, and method of use that is different from other crypto assets.

    This is the reason why the process of selling a crypto asset called Non-Fungible Token is carried out using an auction system. If you want to register a product as a digital asset, the Non-Fungible Token itself includes images, music, videos, games, and even electronic books.

    B. NFTs in the Art Industry

    The emergence of NFTs, which have very unique characteristics, has become material for re-evaluating the digital arts sector so far. NFT offers the security required by works when they are published in digital form. So far, the highly advanced development of the internet has not been able to guarantee that a published work of art will not be duplicated by other people. NFTs have succeeded in providing guarantees to artists so that they are able to make a profit.

    NFT technology that uses a blockchain-based system has succeeded in providing guarantees for artists’ works of art for their property rights. This innovation has helped artists fight against plagiarism and theft of creative ideas. In addition, the smart contract system that exists in NFTs makes artists feel more secure because they can write down the percentage of royalties when the work of art changes hands.

    At this time, NFTs in the art industry have reached a record price tag. The most expensive digital artwork is currently still held by Beeple through a work of art entitled Everydays – The First 5000 Days. This NFT, which sold in March 2021, managed to reach a price of $ 69 million dollars. This success has proven that there is opportunity for NFT assets as well as physical works of art that are sold through exhibitions.

    C. NFT in a Business Context

    1. Property Certificates, Assets, and Licenses

    NFT in its use can be used to link physical assets such as proof of house ownership to proof of other property ownership. NFTs can be a safer place to store physical property ownership deeds by utilizing a blockchain system that has a very fast verification process. Users don’t need to worry if valuable certificates are lost or stolen, the security provided by blockchain is able to protect valuable certificate ownership data.

    It’s just that, the application and development of NFTs as a place to store valuable assets or certificates is still not much done. However, seeing the potential that NFT provides, it makes the future of securing valuable assets easy to use.

    2. Ticketing and Membership Industry

    Until now, there are still many problems found in the ticket industry. The problem that most often occurs is that many brokers buy tickets in large quantities and then resell them at a higher price. Furthermore, a problem that is no less often encountered is fraud by brokers or various ticket sales services that sell duplicated tickets.

    In an effort to support the optimization of the ticket industry, the NFT concept can be a solution to overcome these two problems. With NFT, ticket sales can be done more quickly and safely by using a verification and identification system that is not easy to change.

    Apart from overcoming problems in the ticketing industry, NFT can also provide innovation to manage membership or membership with a digital system. NFTs can be part of digitally identifying proof of a person’s membership. This can be very beneficial for members because they don’t need to be afraid if their data is lost, changed, or used by others.

    The company that has used NFT as proof of membership card is Kraken Kraton. The ticket company has registered the five drawings into an NFT and is giving its members a lifetime discount or a special discount coupon.

    3. Sports and Fashion Industry

    The first use of NFT in the sports industry was marked by the creation of collectible cards from the NBA Top Shot. The existence of collection cards from NBA Top Shot allows basketball lovers to create a collection of important footage from the matches they watch. Not only that, the expansion of NFT in the world of sports was also followed by the Belgian Football League and Jupiler Pro League, which collaborated with game companies Ubisoft and Sorare to make a fantasy soccer game using NFT.

    In 2019, NFT was increasingly trusted in the sports industry when a sports company from the United States, Nike, made a patent with the Crypto Kicks authentication system. The patent rights carried out by Nike mean that loyal purchases of special shoes will result in NFTs accompanied by complete information such as the shoe material, where it was made, and various other unique things. Crypto Kicks owners can also make design modifications to some shoes in their digital form into a new pair of shoes that can be purchased physically in the real world.

    D. NFT In Hobbyist and Entertainment Industry

    1. Collectibles

    The existence of NFT has succeeded in creating a very potential market for conducting transactions for various collectibles. Currently, NFT is increasingly dominated by many items that have the main function as collectibles.

    As many have mentioned above, some of the collectibles that many people are hunting for are NFTs from NBA Top SHot, virtual cats from Crypto Kitties, to many unique avatars from Crypto Punks. The three types of NFTs have become collectibles that have prices reaching millions of United States dollars.

    2. NFT Games

    The game industry that uses the NFT system and blockchain can be said to be a sector that has enormous potential in the crypto world. This potential can be seen from the development of NFT games such as Crypto Kitties and Axie Infinity which are very popular in the world community. In the Crypto Kitties game, users are given the task of collecting, caring for, and breeding digital cats.

    While the game Axie Infinity actually has a concept that is almost the same as Crypto Kitties, the difference is that Axie Infinity users have to collect NFT-based digital pets called Axies. Later, the user’s Axies must fight against other users’ Axies. Many NFT games use a pay-to-earn scheme, this scheme makes you have to play the game if you want to get benefits in the form of tokens or NFTs.

    Axie Infinity and Crypto Kitties were built using the same blockchain network, namely Ethereum. In the game Axie Infinity, there are two tokens that have the ERC-20 standard. That means one can earn money by playing NFT games. A user who plays NFT games and earns SLP tokens or AXS tokens can exchange them for a number of other crypto assets.

    This is the reason why there are many job vacancies for playing NFT games. The reason is, playing NFT games has proven to be very profitable. If users get tokens, they can exchange them for other crypto assets. Some people also have the opinion that NFT games are an investment and can be used to meet the needs of human life.

    E. List of NFT Coins by Market Cap

    1. Axie Infinity (AXS)

    Axie infinity is a game that stands on a blockchain technology network that combines elements of NFT, DeFi, and games. This game was actually created and inspired by two famous games namely Pokemon and Tamagotchi. Almost the same as Pokemon and Tamagotchi, players will be given the task of collecting, caring for, breeding, and fighting with other players. Not only that, players can also trade their creatures named Axies. Each Axies is actually an NFT and comes with a variety of unique attributes.

    Until now, when seen on Coinmarketcap, Aixe Infinity as a coin with the code AXS is able to collect a market capitalization of $ 5.70 billion dollars with a value of $ 93.69 per coin. In addition, Axie Infinity also occupies the first position in the category of NFT transactions worldwide.

    2. Tezos (XTZ)

    Tezos itself is one of the many cryptocurrencies that are in the blockchain technology network using a proof-of-stake (PoS) system. In addition, Tezos is also equipped with a smart contract program like Ethereum. This allowed Tezos to create its own DeFi ecosystem and DApps.

    The Tezos ecosystem has a large enough capacity, thanks to the PoS system which makes transactions with Tezos much cheaper than transactions on Ethereum. Currently, the market cap of Tezos according to Coinmarketcap has touched $4.07 billion dollars and each coin has a price value of $4.66 dollars. XTZ is currently in fourth place in the NFT category by Coinmarketcap.

    3. The Sandbox (SAND)

    The Sandbox or can be called by its code, namely SAND is a game based on the blockchain network. This game was created to maximize the benefits of using NFTs in a wide variety of game assets. In the Sandbox ecosystem, users can play and interact with thousands of other players in a new real world called the metaverse.

    The Sandbox actually has done a lot of cooperation with various big companies around the world such as Atari and also the well-known metal band Avenged Sevenfold. Currently, the SAND token on Coinmarketcap has reached a market capitalization of $5.116 billion dollars with a price per coin SAND has a value of $5.57 dollars. In NFT competition, the Sandbox is currently in 8th place in the NFT transaction category on Coinmarketcap.

    F. How to Buy and Sell NFTs

    For users who want to buy and sell NFTs, there are lots of marketplaces that provide these services. Many digital markets offer NFTs in various forms. The crypto assets that users want to use to buy NFTs can also be adjusted to the chosen platform, for example, CryptoPUnk, Opensea, to Rarible. The three NFT marketplace platforms can only accept payments using Dollars and ETH. On the other hand, sites like NBA Top Shot allow users the freedom to make payments for various types of crypto assets.

    Book Recommendations & Related Articles

  • What are Lucid Dreams? Causes, Impact, and Benefits

    What are Lucid Dreams? Causes, Impact, and Benefits

    Lucid Dream Is- Dreams can also be referred to as sleeping flowers when talking about dreams, of course everyone has experienced dreams when they are deep asleep. Someone who is dreaming is usually not aware of what he is doing because it all happens in the subconscious mind that a person cannot control. However, in fact there is a dream phenomenon that causes a person to be aware and can feel what is going on in their dream world which is also called the Lucid Dream phenomenon .

    Lucid dream is a state where a person feels the world of the subconscious or their dreams in real terms. This phenomenon, although it sounds a bit strange and tends to be scary, because after all, we can’t choose what dreams we want to experience. Is it a beautiful dream or a nightmare? Someone who experiences the lucid dream phenomenon can clearly feel it.

    However, do you know that even though it sounds strange, this lucid dream phenomenon can be explained through medical explanations, you know, Sinaumed’s friends. So, for those of you who want to know more about the lucid dream phenomenon in detail, in this discussion we have summarized all the information regarding the lucid dream phenomenon along with interesting facts in it, the causes, benefits, and impact for someone who experiences it.

    Further discussion of the lucid dream phenomenon can be listened to below!

    What Does Lucid Dream Mean?

    Lucid dream or can be interpreted as a conscious dream is a dream when a person is aware that he is dreaming. The term was coined by the Dutch psychiatrist and writer Frederik (Willem) van Eeden (1860-1932). With lucid dreaming, the dreamer can play an active role and change imaginary experiences in his dream world. Conscious dreams can feel real and alive.

    Lucid dreams can occur in two ways. Dream-initiated lucid dreams (DILD) begin as normal dreams and the dreamer immediately concludes that they are dreaming, whereas wake-initiated lucid dreams (WILD) occur while the person is awake. dream transition from the waking state to the dream state. without feeling unconscious. Conscious dreams have been studied by science and their existence has been recognized.

    Human sleep is divided into two stages: rapid eye movement (GMC) and non-rapid eye movement (GMTC). Like other types of dreams, lucid dreams often occur during the rapid eye movement (REM) phase. This stage is a time when the brain is very active during sleep. These active brain waves cause a person to feel between sleep and wakefulness. Well, this condition causes the phenomenon of dreams, including lucid dreams. People who have lucid dreams will often remember the dream they had, even after they wake up. This is different from normal dreams which are often forgotten after waking up.

    Even so, lucid dreaming is actually not something dangerous or something to be wary of. This type of dream is very common among adults. In addition, lucid dreams rarely have a negative impact on the health of the body. Like other dreams during sleep, sufferers of this condition often wake up in the morning without certain symptoms.

    In addition to the natural phase, lucid dreams are also thought to be related to meditation habits. He said that people who meditate tend to experience lucid dreams more easily. Because meditation is believed to help a person become more relaxed and calm, can improve sleep quality and make life’s dreams more real.

    Interesting Facts About Lucid Dreams

    If you have ever had a lucid dream and are curious about it, here are some lucid dream facts that you should know:

    1. The process of lucid dreaming

    Basically, the sleep phase is divided into two, namely rapid eye movement (REM) and non-rapid eye movement (NREM). During REM sleep, the eyelids are closed but the eyeballs are still moving and brain waves are still active. Meanwhile, the NREM sleep phase occurs when you start to fall into a deep sleep.

    When you sleep, your brain waves are sometimes still active, so you stay in REM sleep longer. These active brain waves will make you feel you are between the stages of sleep and wakefulness. This condition causes dream phenomena, including lucid dreams.

    2. Lucid dreams are different from ordinary dreams

    In a normal dream, one may forget the details of the dream story the next day. However, when someone experiences a lucid dream it is different. Someone who experiences a lucid dream will remember every detail of the dream he is experiencing and it is as if he is experiencing the events in his dream. This is what allows a person to control the lucid dreams they experience.

    3. Lucid dreaming is not a pathology

    Lucid dreams are not a health problem that you need to be aware of. According to a study, almost everyone has had a lucid dream at least once in their life. In fact, a survey shows that around 55% of adults have had lucid dreams.

    Even though it doesn’t have a negative impact on physical health, in some cases and in the long term, frequent lucid dreams can affect a person’s mental health. For example, causing sleep disorders such as sleep paralysis or sleep disorders, as well as anxiety and depression disorders.

    4. Meditation and lucid dreaming

    Research shows that people who meditate regularly are more likely to have lucid dreams. This is because meditation activities can train a person to be more relaxed and calm so that the quality of sleep becomes better and the lucid dreams he experiences can become more real.

    However, it is also theorized that meditators often more easily tap into theta brainwave patterns. This brain wave pattern is formed during REM sleep, which is the sleep stage when a person easily dreams, including lucid dreams.

    Based on the facts about lucid dreaming above, it can be said that this phenomenon is not a dangerous condition and is not related to some myths or mysteries, especially if you only experience it once.

    Even so, if you have the same dream or lucid dream repeatedly, especially if you have experienced trauma, it is likely that the dream is a symptom of a psychological disorder, such as Post-traumatic stress disorder or PTSD. Therefore, if you often experience lucid dreams accompanied by sleep disturbances or have certain psychological problems, you should see a doctor to determine the cause and get the appropriate treatment.

    Negative Impact After Experiencing Lucid Dreams

    In addition to unusual hallucinations, here’s a brief review of some of the adverse effects of lucid dreaming or lucid dreaming that you should be aware of below:

    1. Energy Drain

    Someone who experiences a lucid dream will drain a lot of body energy after waking up from the dream. Because during sleep, only your body rests and your mind, your brain is always forced to be active and very focused.

    Well, it is definitely not good for the health of the human immune system. Indeed, in addition to the body that needs rest, so does the human mind, that is, it needs healthy rest at the right time.

    2. It’s hard to wake up from a dream

    People dream awake, if they are not controlled it will be difficult to wake up from their dreams. Even though the alarm clock is very loud, it is still difficult for you to wake up from a lucid dream. This is caused by sleep dissatisfaction, or fatigue as we call it.

    3. It is difficult to distinguish between dreams and reality

    Called derealization, is the feeling of being alive in reality but apparently not being real. Vice versa, in a dream it seems real, but it is not. This is also due to the fatigue factor that is too deep.

    At this factor, it will be difficult for us to distinguish between dreams and reality.

    4. Sleep quality is getting worse

    Because you are sleeping consciously, your brain is automatically forced to work.

    This can worsen the quality of your sleep. Apart from lucid dreaming, you will feel weak and still sleepy. So don’t abuse this lucid dream method, Sinaumed’s friends

    5. The memory of the brain decreases

    Conscious dreams, in addition to reducing the quality of your sleep, can also reduce the brain’s ability to remember.

    Well, the cause of decreased brain memory is because the neurons in the brain stimulate fantasies too often, including lucid dreams.

    6. Lucid Dreams are addictive

    One of the negative effects of lucid dreaming is that it can be addictive.

    When you are addicted to the world of lucid dreaming, you will often feel sleepy and avoid real-world activities. Dissociation or disconnection from the outside environment can be caused by too many lucid dreaming methods.

    Of course, this can be a physical and mental challenge for you.

    Well, this lucid dream should not be used too often, friend Sinaumed’s, just use it for entertainment or needs so that it is not affected or dangerous by the lucid dream.

    The health benefits of lucid dreaming

    Lucid dream is said to have its own benefits. One of the benefits is for therapy. In this case, lucid dreaming or the ability to control dreams is said to help overcome nightmares. In fact, the right therapy should be able to overcome recurring nightmares.

    Meanwhile it will affect the condition of the body and quality of life. Applying lucid dream therapy with the help of a therapist gives a person self-control. This includes dreams or nightmares. Apart from overcoming nightmares, this therapy also has the potential to help overcome anxiety disorders or obsessions with certain things.

    When someone has a lucid dream, he realizes that this is not the real world. So that he is more flexible and has the courage to explore it. Over time, this sense of courage fostered by dream therapy can then be transferred to the real world. However, not everyone is suitable for this type of therapy. Because under certain conditions, it is very difficult for a person to distinguish between dreams and reality

    Here are some studies showing that lucid dreaming has beneficial health effects, including:

    1. Overcoming nightmares

    Just like any other type of dream, nightmares happen to everyone. However, recurring nightmares can cause stress and anxiety.

    Lucid dreams have the power to overcome nightmares because they allow a person to control the dreams they experience. Furthermore, a person who realizes that he is dreaming will easily realize that the nightmare is not real.

    Sweet dreams are commonly used in Image Repetition Therapy (IRT). This therapy helps patients to re-imagine the nightmares they often experience by coming up with different and more interesting stories.

    In addition, IRT can also be combined with cognitive behavioral therapy (CBT) to improve dream control.

    2. Reduce anxiety

    Slightly different from the previous point, lucid dreams can also reduce symptoms of post-traumatic stress disorder (PTSD) and anxiety, both of which occur due to nightmares or other causes.

    Indeed, lucid dreams allow you to manipulate dreams and create situations in them. With lucid dreaming, you can practice dealing with things that cause anxiety in the real world.

    3. Improve motor skills

    Lucid dreaming has the potential to have a positive impact on a person’s physical recovery and motor skills.

    A 2013 study found that mental motor skills can enhance physical abilities. This fact allows people with disabilities to improve their physical abilities in lucid dreaming.

    4. Stimulate creativity

    Lucid dream allows the dreamer to explore and create anything in his dreams. This can be a fun way to explore ideas and creativity.

    How do you have a lucid dream?

    Some people may want to dream lucidly and benefit from it. Here are some ways to increase your chances of having a lucid dream:

    • Get more sleep during the REM phase by increasing the quality of your sleep each night. You can improve sleep quality by setting a consistent sleep schedule, avoiding using electronic devices before bed, avoiding overeating and caffeine before bed, and creating a relaxing and comfortable atmosphere in your bedroom.
    • Keep a journal about the dream you had. Focusing on the dreams you’re having will increase your awareness of when you’re dreaming.
    • Practice the Induced Mindful Dream Technique (MILD), which involves repeatedly telling yourself that you are about to dream and that you know what dreams are about.
    • Do a reality check, which is taking a test to determine if you are dreaming or awake.

    How to wake up from a lucid dream

    Sometimes you may want to wake up from a lucid dream. Here are a few ways to do this:

    • Shouting or talking loudly in a dream can wake up the brain
    • Continuous blinking can help you mentally prepare to wake up from sleep
    • Deep sleep in a dream
    • Reading signs or books in dreams can activate parts of the brain that are not used during REM

    Conclusion

    So a brief discussion about the meaning of lucid dreaming. Not only understanding the meaning of lucid dreaming, but further discussing the causes, effects, benefits, and ways to do lucid dreams and wake up from these lucid dreams.

    Knowing what the phenomenon of lucid dreaming is gives us knowledge that this is a normal thing, not something strange or mystical because it has received in-depth research from a medical point of view. And it is known that lucid dreaming can also be a useful benefit for the body.

  • What are Influencers? Definition, Types, and Their Impact on Business

    As the number of internet users increases and content on every social media platform increases, the term influencer is heard more and more often. Actually, what or who are influencers ? Simply put, an influencer is someone who can influence other people.

    The closest person an influencer can say is your own family member. They can and do provide information to the household about a product or service. Family members will provide information because they have received information from other people or have experienced the benefits of the product being discussed. An influencer marketing is increasingly sought after by companies to increase engagement .

    Definition of Influencer Marketing

    The all-digital era makes many people have to be good at adjusting themselves, including you and the business you are currently running. Regarding marketing or marketing activities, you as a business owner are required to be able to do marketing in cyberspace, aka online marketing .

    This activity is commonly known as digital marketing . The way it works is to use the internet as an opening for greater opportunities for your business. This strategy is packaged in a modern and up-to-date way by utilizing online platforms .

    If your business currently has target consumers from social media, you can try using influencer marketing services to expand your reach and be able to open up opportunities for collaboration with other fields.

    As the name implies, influence is an important strength of an influencer . They are one of the reasons many business owners invite them to work together to promote a product or service because of their influence.

    Quoted from Hariyanti and Wirapraja (2018: 141), an influencer is a person or figure on social media who has a large or significant number of followers. What they convey can influence the behavior of their followers. Simply put, influencers have the influence for their followers to do something. That’s why, in strengthening marketing and promotion using digital media, using the services of an influencer is one of the strategies.

    Quoting from Marketing Hub, an influencer is someone who has the power to influence the decisions of others because he has authority, knowledge, position, or because of his relationship with the public or audience. Usually, an influencer is someone who works as a blogger, YouTuber, celebrity, or a public figure who has tens of thousands to millions of followers on social media and is considered important in certain communities.

    Influencer marketing is one of a company’s marketing strategies by inviting an influencer to work together in order to increase brand awareness as well as sales tailored to a particular target market.

    As someone who actively uses social media, you must have often seen celebrities or famous people in a community getting endorsements from a product that repeatedly appears in the timeline. Influencer marketing is included in the category of native ads or paid content that displays the same attractive form, quality and function as organic content created by other promotional media.

    The results of the cooperation can vary, depending on the expertise of each influencer . They are also known as key opinion leaders , even though they have different backgrounds, so nothing is really the same when conveyed to internet users.

    Types of Influencers Based on Number of Followers

    Along with the development of information and communication technology in the digital world, especially in social media, there are now types of definitions that make it easier for netizens to find out. Oddie Randa, Chief Operations Officer of Gushcloud Marketing Group, said that influencers are divided into three categories based on the number of followers they have on social media.

    • Nano : Number of followers under 10,000 accounts.
    • Micro : Number of followers 10,000 to 100,000 accounts.
    • Macro : The number of followers is more than 100,000 accounts.

    Oddie further said, “If you have over one or two million followers , that’s a celebrity or what we call a premium influencer . The term celebrity here does not have to be those who have entered television, but are famous.”

    A brief explanation below.

     

    1. Nano Influencers

    Nano is the smallest particle with a size of 50,000 times smaller than the size of a human hair. So, the type of influencer with the smallest reach is a nano influencer with a following of 1,000 to 10,000 people. Despite their small number of followers, nano influencers are a popular choice because they are inexpensive and offer quite a number of other benefits. Not a few companies choose to work with new influencers with no more than 2,000 followers.

    The reason is because the smaller the influencer’s reach makes a company’s target reach more and more. Working with nano influencers can make your brand get other benefits from the community that is their follower. Because the number of followers is small, influencers and their followers can interact and get to know each other better through social media platforms so that the engagement that occurs is even higher.

    Because the community that is the follower of the nano influencer is relatively small and close-knit, his campaign also has a more intimate and personal touch. Followers of nano influencers feel as if getting recommendations from people they trust are like friends. They are also more likely to take action based on advertisements or product reviews of this type.

    Although sometimes, nano influencers rarely identify themselves as influencers because for them social media is just a channel for expressing ideas or hobbies. It could be, the way they work is not or not very professional. Please remember that strong engagement will increase the trust of its followers even higher at very low and affordable costs.

    2. Micro Influencers

    A notch above nano, micro has a follower count of 10,000 to 100,000. In general, the public and netizens have higher trust in this type because there are certain fields they master.

    They usually get followers because they have YouTube channels with special topics such as beauty, gadget reviews, traveling, culinary, or others. Or those who have built an Instagram account and are slowly increasing the number of followers due to actively uploading quality and specific content regularly on certain topics.

    Usually a micro  is a health expert, beauty expert, or other expertise on these two social media. The more niche the theme of the social media content is, the easier it will be for engagement to form organically. Because of this expertise, micro can get loyal and trusted followers with every content they upload on social media. Usually the segment to look for in using micro services  is the age of 18 to 24 years.

    The costs that must be incurred by a businessman to be able to work with micro are still relatively cheap and affordable.

    3. Macro Influencers

    The more followers you have on social media, you can be called a macro . This type can be pinned when it has between 100,000 and one million followers. The engagement between influencers and their followers is still there, but looks less strong. With that many followers , surely the need for the range of messages to be conveyed will be wider and the impact on costs incurred will be greater.

    Macros  tend to have a diverse following or audience with diverse interests. They are on average very concerned with the brand awareness that clients need. They are also easier to access and contact than mega.

    4. Mega Influencers

    Those with more than 1 million followers are called mega influencers . In general, this type works as an artist or an influential person in society with a reach of influence and followers nationally.

    The large number of followers makes it possible for influencers to spread messages in a short time with a wider reach. However, this also affects the funds and costs that must be incurred by businesses because the amounts are very large.

    In addition, mega may not necessarily be considered an expert in a particular field. Because as is commonly seen on social media, the mega is their average celebrity status. Like most celebrities, this mega account  will focus on everyday life rather than a particular topic, aka not niche . That is, it could be that these influencers don’t know anything about your business and their followers are not interested in your brand .

    Types of Influencers Based on Social Media Platforms

    If above is a discussion of influencer categories based on the number of followers , in this section is the platform category used by these influencers .

    1. Bloggers

    This type of influencer is already known among blog writers or blog readers in general. Their posts are searchable by keywords embedded in each post. A blogger is someone who owns and/or manages a blog. There are quite a lot of blogs that are used or focused on doing reviews/reviews about a product, for example the latest gadgets or skincare .

    Reviews written on a blog can be said to be more complete and longer, so readers get clearer information than if they get it on other social media. If the blogger has quite a number of loyal readers, it’s easy for the blogger to recommend a product based on the style of writing and client directions and entice readers to try buying and using the product.

    The number of readers of a blog affects the success of a product campaign up to the marketing stage.

    2. YouTube influencers

    Better known as YouTubers, these influencers who have loyal subscribers/ subscribers always create content in the form of videos about information, including product reviews. Unlike bloggers who write information or product reviews on a blog, YouTubers review things in video form.

    Initially, the term pinned on them was vlogger , aka video blogger . The role of YouTube influencers or YouTubers seems significant, especially with the development of digital technology as it is today. The reason is because more than 90% of internet users get to know a new product through videos uploaded on the YouTube platform. From a video, viewers can see clearly how the product being reviewed by the YouTuber is described.

    3. Instagram influencers

    The term that is more familiar or often heard for an Instagram influencer is Instagram celebgram or celebrity. Usually refers to a public figure who uses the Instagram platform to record various activities, including reviewing a product.

    Instagram has the potential to target the market in Indonesia because our country ranks fourth with the most number of 59 million Instagram users in the world. This data can be a mainstay for business owners or companies to partner with Instagram celebrities or influencers in campaigning or promoting products.

    4. TikTok influencers

    Not much different from YouTubers and celebgrams, TikTok influencers or creators who are usually called have loyal fans and followers who follow every latest content that appears on the homepage. The TikTok algorithm is programmed to rate the videos you like and share. Then, the algorithm starts counting the hours watched, the number of loves, including when the video was shared by its users.

    The number of TikTok users is currently more than one billion. This allows anyone to access videos uploaded on TikTok and the opportunity to earn money from these uploads is even wider. Creators with a significant number of followers on TikTok can become influencers that you can work with because your opportunity to expand market share can be wide open .

    Effect of Number of Followers

    One important note to keep in mind is that the fee for influencer services will be more expensive in line with the increasing number of followers they have. However, you don’t need to worry if you want to use their services. The quality of the content that digital influencers display on each of their social media accounts will get better and better because they, especially mega influencers , have a production team that can produce the best content.

    This is because influencers who have many followers will pay great attention to the quality of their social media content for the benefit of their business. Another important note that you should pay attention to is that choosing an influencer doesn’t necessarily just look at the number of followers. The brand message and corporate image will have an impact if you choose random influencers .

    Make sure you choose influencers carefully. Check first whether the influencer you choose is relevant to your brand , pay attention to the quality of social media content, the influencer’s image in the eyes of the public, and of course adjust the price offered by the influencer according to the budget you have.

     

    Tips for Becoming an Influencer

    If you are interested in becoming an influencer, see the tips below.

    1. Find Interested Things

    This is the first tip from sinaumedia for you. To become an influencer, find something you really like and know about. That’s what you can share with others. If someone else creates content that is different from yours and he succeeds, that doesn’t mean you have to be like him. Create your own content. Research as much as possible before deciding.

    2. Take Advantage of Existing Accounts

    You don’t need to create a new account and start from scratch. Because finding and building followers is not easy. Simply clean up your social media account by deleting content from old posts that don’t match the concept and draft of the content you’re preparing.

    3. Use a Business Profile and Personal Blog

    Go to settings on Instagram and change your account to “ business profile ” for free. With this business account, you can see the engagement data that you have as a whole or per post that you upload. You can view data as needed, including the recommended hours for making a recent photo post. Now, additional reels on Instagram can be used to increase engagement .

    Don’t forget to create a blog or website with your account name. Because you never know how long a social media can survive and exist in cyberspace. A blog or website is like a house that you have without worrying if other social media (which can be likened to a shopping center) are closed.

    4. Working with Brands

    If your social media followers are over 1,000, start becoming a nano influencer . You can try to find brands or companies that need your services. Adjust the needs of the brand with the theme of your account. Browse about the brand you are after and find out who the marketing department is. Introduce yourself and say that you want to create content featuring their product as a sponsor. Slowly, with more and more posts you upload, other brands will come by themselves.

    Conclusion

    The existence of an influencer is needed in the digital era like now. You can search for them and adjust them to the needs of the product or service you have. Influencers have influence for their followers to do something. That’s why, in strengthening marketing and promotion using digital media, using the services of an influencer is one of the strategies.

    You can even become an influencer to gain success and fame like Ria Ricis, Gading Marten, or others. You just take advantage of the account you currently have and start creating useful content.

    • 12 Examples of Marketing Strategies Worth Trying
    • Marketing Management: Definition, Functions, Objectives, Duties, and Concepts
    • Definition of Variable Costs: Characteristics, Types, Examples, and Formulas
    • Definition of Marketing and 7 Types!
    • Definition of Promotion: Definition of Experts, Types, and Examples
  • What are Honey Bees? Types and Ways of Bees Producing Honey

    What is a honey bee? – Who has never consumed honey produced by honey bees? Of course most of Sinaumed’s must have consumed and even experienced the benefits contained in honey, right? As Sinaumed’s knows, honey itself is produced or produced by an insect-type animal called a bee. Sinaumed’s needs to know that not all types of bees can produce honey that can be consumed by humans!

    Indeed, bees are often associated with honey, but that does not mean that all types of bees can produce honey that can and is safely consumed by humans or other living things. To be able to produce honey that can be consumed by humans or other living things, honey must be produced or produced by special bees. What is meant by this particular bee is a bee whose species or type is intended to produce honey that can be consumed by humans or even consumed by other living things. Well, this particular type of bee is a bee commonly known as a honey bee or which in scientific language is known as Apis.

    Actually, there are a lot of things that Sinaumed’s needs to know about this type of bee, starting from what a honey bee is, the types of honey bees, the history of the discovery of honey bee species, the stages in a honey bee colony and their respective duties, how bees honey reproduces, how do honey bees make honey, and many other things related to honey bees. For this reason, on this occasion we provide information that will increase Sinaumed’s’ knowledge so that you know more about honey bees, flying insects that can produce sweet honey that is rich in properties. Check out this article until the end!

    A. What is a Honey Bee?

    Before studying and understanding more deeply about one of the many species of bees, namely the honey bee, Sinaumed’s must first become acquainted with honey bees, right? As the saying goes, don’t know then don’t love.

    Yep! Most of Sinaumed’s probably already know that bees are the only insect of the many types of flying insects that can produce honey in large quantities so that it can be consumed by humans or even other living things. Do you know Sinaumed’s? Honey bees come from a genus called the genus Apis. Sinaumed’s needs to know that this one flying insect besides being able to produce honey which has many benefits, it can also produce pollen or it can also be called pollen, produce propolis or what is known as bee glue, produce beeswax which usually blends with honey, and also can produce poison or commonly known as a bee sting to protect itself from the threat of predators. Wow, that’s a lot too!

    Honey bees themselves are known to have many types that are spread throughout the world, but there are only a few types of honey bees that are usually cultivated to be used as a producer of honey which will later be consumed by humans. There is a detailed explanation of the species of honey bees and the classification of honey bees that Sinaumed’s can study.

    Honey-producing bees or honey bees are known to include approximately seven types or species of bees belonging to the genus Apis. Within the genus Apis itself, it can be estimated that there are approximately 20,000 species in it. According to the information we got, it is now known that there is a subspecies of bees that are known to be able to store honey from flower nectar and produce honey. The number of these subspecies is around 44 subspecies that exist throughout the world.

    Interesting info here! Honey bees make their nests with the basic ingredients of wax or what is commonly known as wax. Wax or wax is produced by bees called worker bees in honey bee colonies. What are worker bees? So surely that question immediately popped up in Sinaumed’s’ mind, right? Don’t worry, later we will tell Sinaumed’s about worker bees in a honey bee colony.

    For the classification of honey bees, it can be explained by the kingdom or kingdom of honey bees is Animalia, the phylum of honey bees is arthropods, the sub phylum of honey bees is mandibulata, the class of honey bees is class Insecta or insects, the sub class of honey bees is pterygota, the order of honey bees are hymenoptera, the suborder of honey bees is cheistograsta, the family of honey bees is apidea, and the last species of honey bees are apis dorsata, apis mellifera, apis cerana, and apis trigona.

    B. Types of Honey Bee Species

    After Sinaumed’s became acquainted with honey bees, the next step was for us to invite Sinaumed’s to find out about several types of honey bees in Indonesia and the bees that are most often used for honey cultivation by bee farmers in Indonesia.

     

     

    1. Giant Honey Bee (Apis Dorsata)

    The giant honey bee, also known as the wild bee, has the Latin name Apis Dorsata, which is the first type of honey bee species. Honey bees with this species are only found in forests in countries that have tropical Asian and subtropical climates. As the name suggests, the giant honey bee has the largest size compared to the size of bees from other species. For the original habitat or original origin of honey bees with this species, it is spread throughout the territory of the State of Indonesia, the State of Singapore, the State of Malaysia, to the Philippines.

    For self-cultivation, it is known that there has been no cultivation action for this species of honey bees. Why is that? According to some statements from beekeepers, this type of honey bee has very wild characteristics and tends to be difficult to tame. Apart from its wild nature, this type of honey bee also has a honey bee body size which is certainly larger than the body size of other types of honey bees. Due to the larger body size of this type of honey bee, the level of pain from the sting it has is also more painful than other types of honey bees.

    For the production of honey from this type of honey bee, they still use the method of taking or harvesting it directly from the forest. Giant honey bees will usually make a nest in a single way and the nest hangs on a tree branch, or maybe they will make a nest on a cliff. To increase the production of honey from the giant honey bees themselves, in one bee colony it can reach around 50 kg to 60 kg for one tree.

    2. Western Honey Bee (Apis Mellifera)

    The western honey bee, also known as the superior bee, which has the Latin name Apis Mellifera, is the second type of honey bee species. This western honey bee was first introduced and included as a type of honey bee species in Indonesia around 1841, until now western honey bees continue to be bred for cultivation.

    Sinaumed’s needs to know that this type of honey bee is a favorite of beekeepers. Why is that? This is because giant honey bees are able to produce honey in large quantities, that is, in one colony it can reach around 35 kg to 40 kg in one year. Not only for that reason, giant honey bees have much better adaptability to weather and climate than other honey bees, this makes it very easy for beekeepers to cultivate this type of western honey bee.

    For the distribution area of ​​the western honey bee itself, it is spread around the mainland of the European Continent, such as between the regions of the United Kingdom, Italy, France, Greece, and various countries belonging to the Mediterranean Continent region.

    3. Eastern Honey Bee (Apis Cerana)

    Eastern honey bees or also known as local bees have the Latin name Apis Cerana. Eastern honey bees live and spread in almost all parts of Indonesia. For the amount of honey produced, one eastern honey bee colony is capable of producing as much as 6 kg to 12 kg of honey within one year.

    4. Dwarf Honey Bee (Apis Trigona/Florea)

    Dwarf honey bees or also known as bees with the Latin name Apis Florea are the last type of honey bee species. As the name suggests, pygmy honey bees have the smallest body size of honey bees compared to the size of other types of honey bees. Dwarf honey bees tend to be more docile and fortunately these bees do not have a sting like other types of honey bees.

    For honey production from honey bees with this type of dwarf honey bee, the honey production tends to be the least compared to honey production from other types of honey bees. In a colony of pygmy honey bees can only produce and produce honey weighing 1 kg to 3 kg in one year.

    For the distribution of these dwarf honey bees, they have habitats or are spread across the territory of the Arabian Peninsula, Pakistan, Bangladesh and even Indonesia. In Indonesia itself, the pygmy honey bee is more familiarly known as the Klanceng wasp.

    C. Levels of Honey Bees and Their Duties

    After getting to know and learning about several types of honey bees that are spread in Indonesia, now is the time for Sinaumed’s to know about the levels or types of honey bees that exist in a colony along with the tasks of each level in a honey bee colony.

    As explained earlier, honey bees are flying insects that have social characteristics, so honey bees live in colonies or groups. In one honey bee colony, it is known that there are 10,000 to 60,000 honey bees. Wow so many, right?

    In one honey bee colony it is known to have levels or what can be called three types of family members. The three types of honey bee family members have their respective roles and duties which are useful for the survival of the bee colony. In the following, we will explain the three family members in a honey beb colony along with their respective roles.

    1. Queen Bee

    The queen bee is the only female bee which plays an important role in the survival of a honey bee colony. Why is that? This is because in a honey bee colony there is only one female bee which becomes the queen bee. If in a colony there are two queen bees, the two queen bees will fight until one of the two queen bees dies, or also until one of the two queen bees leaves the hive of the honey bee colony.

    The queen bee has characteristics that can be said to be very striking, such as the queen bee has a stomach that tends to be longer than the other bees, the queen bee has a relatively longer size and the wings are shorter compared to the body parts. In addition, the queen bee has a larger chest size compared to worker bees, and the final feature of the queen bee is that the head of the queen bee is shaped differently from other bees, which is round in shape.

    The life of the queen bee is very different from worker bees or male bees. Why is that? The queen bee never looks for her own food and is always served by worker bees. The life span of the queen bee is known to be longer than that of other bees, which is almost 4 to 6 years. The queen bee’s job during her life is just to lay eggs and enlarge the bee colony and increase the number of honey bees hatching.

    2. Male Bee (Drone)

    The number of male bees in a honey bee colony is only around 100. Male bees have the main task or main task of marrying the queen bee. Not just any male bee dares to marry the queen bee, only adult male bees dare to marry the queen bee. The mating process between male bees and queen bees is carried out by flying as high as possible when the weather is very sunny. The male bees then chase the queen bee, only the male bees that can chase the queen bee are able to marry the queen bee.

    After the mating process between the male bees and the queen bee occurs, the male bee will automatically or soon die because the testicles have detached from the body and fused with the queen bee’s ovary organs. After that, the bodies of the male bees will automatically become food for the worker bees.

    Male bees have several special characteristics, in shape and size they are almost similar to queen bees, but male bees have relatively slimmer bodies and have large, touching eyes located above the heads of male bees.

    3. Worker Bees

    In a honey bee colony it is known that there are 30,000 to 60,000 worker bees. Worker bees themselves have several characteristics that distinguish them from the queen bee and the drone bees. The characteristics of the worker bees are the body size of the worker bees which can be said to be the smallest when compared to the body sizes of the queen bee and the male bee. It has a head shape with a triangular shape with long hairy hind legs. Make no mistake, the long hairs on the bee’s legs are useful as a storage place for pollen when worker bees are flying in search of food. Here are some other tasks that worker bees have.

    • In charge of building a beehive as a place to lay eggs for the queen bee.
    • In charge of collecting food materials in the form of nectar, water, and pollen.
    • In charge of giving and foraging for male bees and queen bees.
    • In charge of tidying and cleaning beehives.
    • In charge of producing honey.
    • In charge of maintaining the safety of beehives.

    D. How Honey Bees Produce Honey

    Interesting info, worker bees are female bees that don’t become queens. Worker bees have an important role in collecting flower nectar which will later be produced into honey. The following is the method or process of worker bees making honey.

     

     

    1 Hunt and Gather Nectar

    Worker bees will start flying as far as 6 km to 8 km to find nectar or flower extract which will later be produced into honey.

    2. Turning Nectar Into Honey

    Afterwards, the nectar will be processed into honey by being chewed by the worker bees, the worker bees will produce enzymes that can increase the acidity level in the nectar and turn it into honey.

    3. Dry honey after chewing

    After that the bees will dry the nectar that has become honey. The bees use two methods to dry the honey, namely by spreading the semi-finished honey to the honeycomb which has a hexagon shape and the second is by fanning the semi-finished honey using its wings.

    4. Protect Honey with Beeswax

    The final step is the honey storage process, this process is carried out by storing honey in the cells in the beehive. To be able to maintain the quality of honey, bees use beeswax produced by bees.

    Now that’s some knowledge about all things about honey bees that Sinaumed’s can know and learn. Lots right? Starting from an introduction to honey bees, getting to know their types, so they know how bees produce honey.

    Book Recommendations & Related Articles

     

  • What are Heuristics? Historical Research Methods, Definitions, & Examples

    Heuristics – Will Sinaumed’s do research or even work on a thesis project related to history? If so, then Sinaumed’s needs to start getting acquainted and learning heuristic terms. In history, the term heuristic is a research method.

    In order to be able to do good research on historical topics, Sinaumed’s needs to understand heuristic research methods well first. The following is an explanation of the meaning, examples of the application of the method and the types that need to be known. Listen to the end of the article!

    Definition of Heuristics

    Literally, heuristic comes from the Greek word heuriskein which means to find. In general, heuristics can be interpreted as an art or a science that has to do with a new discovery or a solution that can solve a problem.

    According to other sources, heuristics are described as a way to show the thoughts that are owned by someone, so that person can solve a problem and the problem can be completed and completed immediately.

    In history, this term is known as one of the research methods and is defined as a series of stages in the process of collecting sources from various types of research data related to research topics regarding socio-culture, customs, social stratification and daily interactions obtained through observation, documentation, interviews and so on.

    Simply put, a heuristic is a simple and efficient rule that is commonly used by humans to be able to form judgments on something and can also be used to make a decision.

    Meanwhile in historical science, there is also the term historical technique. This term can also be referred to as a heuristic method. By using the application of heuristic techniques, one can solve a problem, find something and make a decision.

    Apart from being general, experts also express their own opinions such as J. Rainer. Although heuristics are generally defined as part of historical science, J. Rainer has a different opinion.

    Rainer argues that heuristics is not part of a science, but an art. He argues that heuristics is a skill that is used to find something, review bibliographies and can also be used to correct a collection of notes.

    For J. Reiner, heuristics is a method used by someone by involving the skills they have to find something that has a relationship with history or events that have been missed.

    These skills, can make someone write a review on a bibliography. At the same time analyzing, finding and correcting records of events that have occurred.

    Understanding According to Experts

    Apart from J. Rainer, other experts also expressed their opinion about the definition of heuristics.

    1. Carrad

    Heuristics according to Carrad is a first step that is used to obtain sources or origins, materials and data related to history that can be used in activities that will be or are being carried out.

    2. Dudung Abdulrahman

    In his book published in 1990, Dudung Abdurahman argues that heuristics is a research technique used in historiography through the skills to find, recognize and detail certain topics using small notes.

    3. Sjamsudin

    Sjamsudin argues that heuristics is the first step used in historical research to obtain research data.

    Currently, more identical heuristics are used in research activities. Heuristic skills can help someone to find important historical data that is considered relevant to the research topic.

    When studying history, researchers need strong evidence to be able to draw a conclusion. Because these findings will be published and known by the general public, researchers cannot simply conclude from opinions, opinions or estimates.

    Researchers must find a basis and concrete evidence. In the process of finding this evidence, the heuristic skills possessed by researchers are needed. Heuristics can also help find data properly and accurately, so that research results can be justified.

    Types of Heuristics

    Along with its development, heuristics can then be referred to as one of the historical sources, because heuristics is a process to find historical evidence and form a series of events that are concrete and have happened before.

     

     

    1. Types of Heuristics Based on Their Nature

    In its application, heuristics can be divided into two types according to their nature. Here’s an explanation.

    a. Primary source

    The first type of heuristic is primary sources, namely a series of historical sources obtained directly from people or actors who have experienced these historical events. For example, when compiling a biography of a character, researchers can obtain data through direct interviews with that character. The data obtained through interviews with figures can be referred to as primary sources.

    Primary sources are not only obtained through interviews with direct actors, but can also be obtained through other valid sources such as photos, manuscripts, diaries and even videos.

    b. Secondary source

    Secondary sources are a series of historical sources that are obtained not from direct actors or people who experience that history, but through other people who are close to that person, the perpetrator’s family or someone who is directly involved in and experiences the event.

    All sources of data submitted apart from figures who experienced history themselves were included in secondary sources. For example, when a researcher writes a biography of a character who has died, it is impossible for the researcher to get secondary sources. However, researchers can obtain secondary sources by interviewing the closest people, family and looking for other historical sources about the figure.

    Secondary sources in heuristics can also take the form of research reports, encyclopedias, books, field notes and others. So that secondary sources actually have a broader form than primary sources and can be utilized by researchers.

    2. Types of Heuristics Based on Historical Sources

    Based on the form of historical sources, heuristics are divided into three. Here’s an explanation.

    a. Written sources

    As the name implies, written sources in heuristics are historical sources that are written or in written form. Examples include the text of the agreement, diary, minutes and so forth.

    b. Oral sources

    Historical sources can also be obtained verbally from interviews with figures, relatives or by listening to stories from people who live in the historical sites being studied.

    c. Relics

    The third type of heuristic based on historical sources is relics with certain shapes and types. Examples include ancient objects, artifacts, bones and others.

    Heuristic Strategy

    Heuristics are not only used for historical scientific research activities. Heuristic skills are also applied in learning activities. When used to support learning activities, lecturers and teachers can choose one of two heuristic strategies. The following is an explanation of the heuristic strategy.

    1. Discovery ( Discovery )

    According to Suryosubroto, the first strategy in heuristic skills is discovery. Finding is a teaching procedure that emphasizes individual teaching, before finally arriving at generalizations.

    So that with this discovery method, a teacher can focus on just one student to find out student problems in the learning process. At the same time to ensure that students can absorb learning material well.

    Meanwhile, in heuristic expertise research activities with the discovery method is a process to find historical sources by searching for these historical sources. For example, looking for historical relics in the library for secondary sources in the form of writing.

    2. Investigation ( Inquiry )

    According to Wina Sanjaya, the inquiry strategy in the learning method is a method that emphasizes student activity to be active in critical and analytical thinking processes.

    Meanwhile in research activities, the method of inquiry or inquiry is a process of inquiry to obtain various valid data sources. To obtain it, it can be done by collecting all data sources and conducting interviews or so on.

    Section in Heuristic Strategies

    Aside from being a learning method, heuristic strategies as problem solvers for a study can be divided into four parts, including availability, representativeness, familiarity and adjustment or restraint. Here’s an explanation.

    1. Availability

    The availability heuristic operates on the idea that if something can be recalled, then it is something that is important or at least has a more important value than an alternative solution in order to be easy to remember, because information is easy to get.

    2. Representation

    Used when researchers make judgments about the subjective probability of an event or information by determining the extent to which the event has similar characteristics or whether the event can reflect the salient features of a resulting process.

    3. Adjustment and retention

    Used to influence the way people intuitively judge probabilities. Where one would start from an implicitly suggested reference point and use it to make adjustments to arrive at an estimate of additional information.

    4. Familiarity

    Defined to assess an important event, because it is more familiar in memory. The familiarity heuristic is based on the use of schemes as well as past actions.

    Stages of Heuristic Research

    In addition to these two heuristic strategies, in conducting historical research using heuristic methods, researchers must know and understand the stages of research using heuristic methods. Here’s an explanation.

    1. Determine the theme and title of the research

    The theme and title of the research are the first things that must be determined in the research. Not only in historical research, but also research with other sciences. The theme taken by the researcher must have a relationship with historical events and be known by the general public.

    Examples include the history of the development of the city of Jakarta from the Dutch colonial era to the present or other themes regarding Indonesian history. There are many historical events that can be used as topics or friends for historical research. If confused, Sinaumed’s can try to adjust to the references that are the most numerous or easy to find or adjust to Sinaumed’s’ wishes and mastery of the subject matter.

    2. Looking for historical data sources

    After determining the theme and title of the research, Sinaumed’s needs to find historical sources. Historical sources in heuristic research methods can be found from various sources according to their type, such as primary and secondary sources. Sinaumed’s can also combine various forms of sources to complement research data.

    Because one research theme can have several historical sources in various forms, so combining historical sources will strengthen Sinaumed’s’ research data.

    3. Visit the event location

    Historical sources cannot be obtained only by looking for one secondary source. So, Sinaumed’s also needs to find primary sources by visiting the location of the event. Thus, Sinaumed’s as a researcher will find more and more complex sources. For example, if Sinaumed’s takes the theme of Majapahit history research, then Sinaumed’s can visit East Java or Mojokerto or other places that were previously known to be the location of the Majapahit kingdom.

    4. Review and analyze historical sources

    The most important stage in research is studying and analyzing all historical sources that have been collected by researchers. Then Sinaumed’s, as a researcher, needs to systematically discuss these historical sources one by one. For example, starting from explaining the date of the event under study, its causes and solutions to solve it when the event took place.

    5. Compile a report based on the analysis of historical sources

    The final stage in the preparation of research using the heuristic method is compiling a report from the analysis of historical sources, in the form of a scientific article. If Sinaumed’s conducts the research as a final coursework such as a thesis, then Sinaumed’s needs to prepare a report according to the general thesis writing rules.

    Examples of Heuristics in Research

    From the explanation above, is Sinaumed’s still confused about how to apply heuristic methods in historical research? If you are still confused, here are examples of heuristics in research that Sinaumed’s needs to know about.

    To apply the heuristic method in a study, Sinaumed’s needs to choose themes and titles that have a relationship with history. An example is the history of the growth of the Majapahit Kingdom in Indonesia, as it is known that Majapahit was the largest kingdom in Indonesia at its time.

    Therefore, in the research process, Sinaumed’s needs to find sources that explain about the Majapahit Kingdom systematically. Such as the process of birth, when the existence of the Majapahit Kingdom began to be built until the times of the kingdom’s collapse. This entire process must be carried out until it reaches the process of compiling a historical report on the Majapahit Kingdom.

    Another example of heuristics in research is the bombing of Hiroshima City. When making a research title, it is better for Sinaumed’s to compose a detailed and conical title, so that the research discussion is clear on the topic. For example “The Hiroshima City Bombing on August 6, 1945” with that title, the following is writing research systematically using heuristic methods.

    Looking for historical sources that explain the warrant for the bombing of the City of Hiroshima issued on August 5, 1945. Include photos of the atomic bomb with the nickname little boy that was dropped on the City of Hiroshima. Explains who are the historical perpetrators of the Hiroshima City bombing and one of them is an airplane pilot named Enola Gay Paul Tibbet. Describes the plane driven by Enola Gay as a form of historical heritage from the bombing of Hiroshima City.

    After obtaining these historical sources, it is important for Sinaumed’s as a researcher to verify the research data. So that the research results are valid and can be accounted for.

    That is the explanation of heuristics as a method of historical research. If Sinaumed’s is still confused about heuristics or wants to find out more about other research methods in other disciplines, Sinaumed’s can find out by reading books related to research methods.

    Sinaumed’s can get books related to heuristics at sinaumedia.com . As #Friends Without Limits, sinaumedia always provides a variety of books according to Sinaumed’s’ needs, including information about research methods, so that you have #MoreWithReading information.

  • What are good manners when speaking? Listen Here!

    Manners When Talking – When having a conversation with someone it can be a first impression for someone to describe ourselves outwardly. Because in a conversation, the style of language, choosing the right words, and how we can discuss a topic are definitely the main impressions for someone judging how we are.

    Interactive conversation or communication is social interaction between two or more people. Developing conversation and etiquette skills is an important part of socialization. The focus of language teaching and learning is often on developing conversational skills in the new language. Starting a conversation with friends or other people must use the proper manners so that the conversation becomes more civilized and attracts our interlocutor to talk to.

    In a conversation manners are also very important to use and of course adjust to who the other person we are dealing with. Because it feels unethical to chat with older people, such as teachers or lecturers, not using formal language. For this reason, it is very important to learn manners when we speak so that the person we are talking to is also respectful and respects us.

    Furthermore, the discussion regarding how to have good manners when speaking tea=we summarize and can be listened to below!

    Definition of Manners

    Before discussing further about good manners when speaking, let’s first look at what is the definition of manners below!

    Manners are our reaction to the actions or actions of other people towards us by prioritizing social norms and polite norms. Because manners is an attitude of respect for other people, both people who are older, the same age, or even younger than us.

    In Indonesia itself various forms of manners are imaged through the absorption of various strong cultures throughout the archipelago. In some areas, such as Java, they use Kromo Inggil or fine Javanese to greet older people. All manners that apply in the archipelago are certainly influenced by local customs that adjust to the social conditions of its citizens, of course.

    In Islam, manners can be called adab. The role of adab is very vital in the teachings of Islam, one might even say that one must prioritize adab first and then knowledge. Because, someone who only relies on knowledge without being accompanied by adab is like a big tree with weak roots.

    Etymologically, manners come from the words grammar and habits. Tata means rules, regulations or arrangements. Although krama means politeness, both words can be interpreted as general rules of politeness that have been established. Manners are polite behavior that is applied in everyday life. This behavior reflects the personality that has been formed since childhood through the ways taught by parents and the surrounding environment. Manners are also part of human nature from which habits are formed, such as eating and drinking, dressing and other human habits. Behavior is also an individual characteristic and becomes a person’s character.

    Manners can also be interpreted as a rule of life in human relations. Customs are closely related to ethics. Ethics is a theory of human behavior that is seen in terms of good and bad that can be determined by reason. According to experts, manners have several meanings, namely as follows:

    • Bertens emphasized that manners have three meanings, namely manners in the sense of values ​​or norms that serve as regulatory guidelines for a person or group of people. behavior, adab in the sense of a set of principles or moral values ​​of character, and adab in the sense of good and bad knowledge.
    • According to Black, manners is a science that describes how humans treat each other.
    • According to Taryati, customs or morals are rules that are inherited and developed in the culture of a society, with which a person can create familiarity, mutual understanding, and mutual respect in interacting with others, according to established practices.

    Based on the above understanding, it can be concluded that manners are regular actions or activities in daily life in accordance with the customs or norms that apply when interacting with the environment. In other words, manners are conventional norms governing manners that are agreed with the environment.

    Good Manners When Speaking

    How to Talk Talking is one of the daily activities of humans.

    Manners in speaking is a way of speaking that shows the quality of personality. When speaking, you should use polite language, familiarize yourself with greetings, careful intonation, avoid harsh vocabulary and use words such as sorry, excuse me, and thank you.

    Reports to the spruce, avoids not taking turns when talking (interrupting), lying and creating an uncomfortable atmosphere, asking rude questions and not allowing others to express their opinion. Examples of poor speech patterns include suddenly changing the subject, interrupting the conversation, maintaining eye contact while speaking, answering when asked, monopolizing the conversation, speaking sharply, or speaking in a loud voice like shouting.

    To avoid speaking that is not in accordance with these manners, let’s see how examples of good manners when speaking below!

    1. Greet enthusiastically

    Starting a conversation with enthusiasm has a positive effect on communication. As a good means of communication, language should inspire those who hear it, so before you communicate, remember to greet others with a smile or words of encouragement.

    2. Look into the eyes of the other person

    When someone else is saying something, the gaze and direction of the eyes must be looking and fixed on the other person. This signals others that what they are saying is being heard correctly. Do not turn left and right too often, because it will create the impression of being rude and disrespectful.

    Showing enthusiasm for others is an example of good behavior. This enthusiasm is shown by paying attention and looking at the other person. Otherwise, pay attention to what is being said.

    Be polite. For example, it’s good for parents to look down a bit. However, it’s a good idea to look her in the eye when talking to peers.

    3. Don’t Talk About Other People’s Bad Things

    Speak about things that are good and useful, so that communication has clear meaning and benefits. Don’t just get involved in conversations that contain hatred, SARA, racism, and other people’s ugliness.

    4. If you cough, cover your mouth

    In synchronous communication, the habit of sitting, standing, and other ethical rules that must be considered and followed during communication is a good habit. Especially when you cough or sneeze, cover your mouth with your hand to show respect to other people or those around you.

    5. Do not force

    Smooth communication requires using soft words and not forcing the other person to fulfill all our demands. During interpersonal communication, try to ask questions in a gentle and friendly manner, so that the purpose of the communication can be well received.

    6. Listen carefully

    Communication involves long conversations with each other, so good manners or communication ethics is when the other person is talking, listen carefully and carefully so that the other person feels valued and listens to his complaints.

    7. Do not speak too fast

    When communicating, try not to speak too fast or too slow, so that the other person can hear clearly what we are saying. Intonation or accentuation of tone and facial expressions also does not cause discomfort or danger to the other party. One of the factors that influence the message is not good, one of which is talking too long.

    8. Speak politely and kindly

    In communicating with someone you should use polite words, so that the communication process runs smoothly and smoothly and there are no communication barriers that can cause misunderstandings between the parties.

    Choose words and sentences that are suitable for the person you are talking to. For example, some languages ​​have specific words and dialects for older or younger people. use language according to rules with others. Also avoid dirty words that might offend others.

    9. Avoid placing yourself higher than the other person

    An example of applying politeness in verbal communication is not placing oneself above others. In some areas, this is common. However, you should avoid them everywhere.

    10. Do not dominate the conversation

    One example of applying manners in oral communication is not dominating the conversation. Give the other person a chance to speak. If you dominate the conversation too much, the other person may get angry and decide not to continue the conversation.

    11. Be a good listener

    When others share their opinion, pay attention and be a good listener. Especially if what he is talking about is pouring out or venting about his heart’s content. Others may need to be consulted to reduce the burden.

    12. Avoid interrupting the conversation

    In light of the previous point, to be a good listener, don’t interrupt the conversation. Except in certain cases, like when the conversation is too long or if you want permission to leave the conversation for a while. Must say permission to politely interrupt.

    13. Avoid pointing at other people or hands on hips

    The position of pointing at another with your hand on your waist shows pride and feeling above others. This is of course very impolite and will irritate other people. Instead, stand in a normal position and don’t point at anyone.

    14. Manners When Talking to Three People

    Be honest when talking to two people. Look at the two interlocutors alternately, so that neither interlocutor feels left out. Also, don’t whisper to just one person you’re talking to. This will definitely make other interlocutors uncomfortable.

    Also, don’t use language that only one person can understand, such as whispering to one person you’re talking to, also making the other person uncomfortable.

    15. Avoid excessive joking

    Avoid as much as possible. Especially if the jokes are about physical fitness, religion, race, and more. Such jokes can hurt other people. Laughing too hard is also not good.

    16. Manners of oral communication using communication tools

    In addition to direct verbal communication, it is very important to know how to communicate through the means of communication. When starting a conversation, start with a greeting and introduce yourself the first time you interact. First, make sure the people you’re talking to are the people you want to talk to. When you stop talking, stop saying hello.

    Manners of Speaking When Discussion

    In addition to the examples of good manners when speaking on a daily basis, we have also summarized ways to practice good manners when expressing an opinion in a discussion below:

    Indonesians often make decisions by talking to other people. However, it is not uncommon for differences of opinion to occur in the discussion. Such differences of opinion are natural and normal for everyone. From there, people learn to reason to reach an agreement.

    Negotiations are held to avoid conflicts arising from differences of opinion. Therefore, we need the right way to direct our opinions to other people so as not to cause differences of opinion.

    1. Express your opinion politely

    If you want to express your opinion, say it politely and politely. Don’t hurt others with harsh words and promises.

    2. Know Your Expertise

    Before expressing an opinion, make sure that you know your expertise and have a good understanding of the subject matter of the opinion being expressed. This avoids off-topic discussions and creating conflict.

    3. Make strong and clear arguments

    In expressing opinions, should have strong and clear arguments. Better yet, you also have the data and facts to back up your point.

    4. Don’t interrupt other people’s conversations

    Don’t interrupt other people’s conversations when you want to express your opinion. Let the person you’re talking to express their opinion completely and clearly, then respond when asked to speak up.

    5. Don’t attack people you talk to personally

    Especially if it is not related to the topic of conversation. This, of course, is one of the things that can spark conflict in a conversation.

    Because if you start attacking the person you’re talking to personally in an argument, it’s increasingly stating that you yourself don’t have a proper argument and are running out of words but don’t want to give in.

    Conclusion

    That’s all for a brief discussion of how to have good manners when speaking. Not only discussing the importance of learning manners when speaking, but also further discussing examples and their application in direct communication.

    Learning manners when speaking is something that is very basic, especially for a human being as a social being because using good manners when speaking makes others more respectful and makes ourselves more civilized.

  • What are Fixed Assets? Characteristics, Types, and Benefits

    Fixed Assets are – Talking about business, maybe what Sinaumed’s has in mind is just the production process, finished products, sold and then made a profit. Yes indeed it is in the business flow process. But actually there are other things that are enough to support the development of a business, you know .

    One of them is fixed assets , for ordinary people this term is rarely heard. But for business people it is often heard.

    If Sinaumed’s is going to run a business, understanding what fixed assets are is very important. Moreover, the existence of these fixed assets can provide support for the development of a business.

    You don’t need to be confused if Sinaumed’s doesn’t know what a fixed asset is and some other things related to this term. Because this article will provide an explanation about this. So, below are some important explanations about fixed assets .

    What are Assets

    Before going into the explanation of fixed assets , we can start from the explanation of the assets themselves. Simply put, company assets are an economic resource that is expected to be able to generate profits in the future.

    An asset can be recognized if all economic resources can be measured in currency. Whether it’s dollars, rupiah and other types of currency. It is undeniable that the existence of assets is very important in a company.

    In fact, the existence of this asset support is expected to make business processes even smoother. Besides in the form of objects such as land, money, buildings, tools and equipment. It turns out that assets also include human resources such as employees and service users or product buyers offered by a company.

    What are Fixed Assets

    After knowing the meaning of assets , we continue to discuss fixed assets. In simple terms, a fixed asset is a property or asset in the form of property or equipment with a long-term nature .

    The existence of fixed assets is expected to be able to provide business process support in order to get certain benefits. Fixed assets are also often referred to as fixed assets. At least for fixed assets can not provide an advantage in the form of money in the range of under or about one year.

    If you look at the balance sheet, the existence of fixed assets can be in the form of property , factories or equipment. Apart from being referred to as fixed assets, several forms of fixed assets are also often referred to as capital assets .

    Characteristics of Fixed Assets

    Some of you are confused about how to distinguish fixed assets and non-fixed assets. Actually, in terms of characteristics alone, it can be seen what a fixed asset is . But maybe because of the lack of information related to the characteristics of fixed assets , some people don’t know about it.

    No need to be confused about this, at this point we will provide a more complete explanation regarding the characteristics of fixed assets . So, no need to linger, below is a review of some of the characteristics possessed by fixed assets .

    1. The useful life from an economic perspective is more than one year

    The first characteristic of fixed assets is that the age of these assets has a long reach, at least more than one year. Then, in the fixed asset balance sheet, most of them are in the form of property, equipment in the factory or the factory building itself.

    2. There is a Depreciation Value

    The second characteristic is the depreciation value of various forms of fixed assets . This can happen because these fixed assets are used continuously from time to time.

    In addition, due to continuous use of fixed assets, it can also result in a decrease in quality. No wonder the value of fixed assets also decreased. However, it should also be noted that the depreciation condition does not apply to land type fixed assets  .

    3. Providing Benefits for the Company

    The next characteristic of fixed assets is being able to provide benefits for the company. For example, a company has a production plant. Production carried out by the factory uses operational equipment or one form of fixed asset .

    Later the results of the production carried out will be sold. The profit from the sale is one of the characteristics of fixed assets .

    4. Not in Liquid Form

    The last characteristic of fixed assets is that they are not in liquid form. This means that fixed assets cannot be converted into money or into cash.

    Those are some of the characteristics possessed by fixed assets . Of course, the discussion about fixed assets does not end there . There is still a lot of material that we can learn together as below.

    Fixed Asset Types

    The next explanation is on the type of fixed asset . Actually this type of asset will be explained based on an example. However, so that you understand better too, there will be an additional explanation of the types of fixed assets based on their shape. The following is an explanation of the types of fixed assets based on examples.

    Tangible Fixed Assets

    As the name implies, a tangible fixed asset is an asset that has a physical form. Tangible fixed assets are still divided into three. You can read about these three types in the explanation below.

    1. Assets with depreciable value. Examples are buildings, machines, vehicles, laptops and others.
    2. Assets with a value that can experience depletion conditions. This depletion condition is in the form of natural resources that will run out due to continuous exploitation by companies. Examples are the natural resources of oil, coal, gold and so on.
    3. Assets that are not experiencing conditions of deflation or depreciation. Soil is one example.
    • Land

    Land is the first example of a fixed asset . If a company has a fixed asset in the form of land, then the company can make a long-term investment. Of course the company will benefit from the type of land investment it does. Even from these benefits can also be a support for the sustainability of the company itself.

    • Building

    Next there is a building or building which is also an example of a fixed asset . Recording of buildings that stand on land must also be separated from the land used for the construction of a building.

    • Machine

    Furthermore, there are machines that are also included in the fixed asset type . Where the existence of this machine is also a supporter of the continuity of the production process of an item that aims to provide benefits for the company.

    As for examples of the machine itself, such as computers, printers , fax machines and telephones. In addition, several other office equipment such as tables, chairs, cabinets and others in the company or factory are also included as a type of fixed asset .

    • Conveyor Tool

    Transport equipment is also included in the category of fixed assets . Where later this transportation tool is used to deliver goods produced to consumers, clients and other parties who work with the company.

    Then, for example, there are trucks, vans and other types of vehicles that can be used to deliver these products.

    • Infrastructure

    Lastly, there is infrastructure which is also included in the fixed asset type . For example, roads, bridges and fences.

    Intangible Fixed Assets

    Just as the name implies, an intangible fixed asset is an asset that has no physical form but provides benefits for the company. Examples are copyrights, patents, franchise rights, trademarks, logos and so on.

    Based on the explanation above, the types of fixed assets can also be seen based on their shape. At least there are tangible fixed assets and intangible fixed assets . Both have different meanings.

     

    How Important are Fixed Assets for Companies?

    Maybe in your mind you have a question about how important fixed assets really are for a company, or whether a company really and should have fixed assets . The answer is that fixed assets are very important for a company.

    The sustainability of the company will continue to run and develop when it has fixed assets . Like the several types and examples of fixed assets described above. All examples always refer to the production to distribution processes that provide benefits to the company.

    Just imagine if a company does not have fixed assets . Of course it can’t work as it should. In addition, for investors the existence of fixed assets in a company is also a special consideration when investing in that company.

    It should also be noted , investors will be more interested in investing in companies that are able to use fixed assets more efficiently. This is because the more efficient fixed assets are , the greater the profit will be.

     

    Benefit Information About Fixed Assets

    The existence of fixed assets is also very important , you know the reporting for the sustainability of the company. This is because a company will find it easier to get investors if fixed assets can be put to good use.

    Investors will make fixed asset reporting a determinant of whether they will continue to provide investment funds or buy shares in the company. In addition, fixed assets can also help the process of recording finances more accurately, assessing the running of the company’s business so that the overall financial process will also be easier.

     

    How Companies Get Fixed Assets

    It turns out that a company can have fixed assets in various ways . Maybe even some of you who do not know some of these ways. Don’t worry, at this point there will be a full explanation of several ways a company can get fixed assets . The following is an explanation of this.

    • Cash Purchase

    Fixed assets in a company can be obtained by purchasing cash. Meanwhile, the fixed asset purchase price recording will be the same as the set price. For example, a plot of land has a price of IDR 100 million, so the record is made with the same figure, namely IDR 100 million. The point is that the price recording of fixed assets obtained from cash purchases will be recorded absolutely as is, there is no change in the number.

    • Purchase With Installment System

    Fixed assets can also be obtained by installments. The fixed asset payment process will be carried out for a predetermined period of time. However, only the price section is recorded, while the interest that is applied will still be recorded, but separately from the price section.

    • Exchange With Securities

    Fixed assets can be consolidated with a securities exchange system. Meanwhile, for recording the price of the fixed assets obtained will be equated with the price of the letters exchanged.

    However, if the price of the securities to be exchanged is not known, then the recorded price will be set at the market value of the fixed asset.

    • Exchange With Other Assets

    Fixed assets can also be done by exchanging other assets. The process of exchanging other assets for fixed assets is also often referred to as trade-in.

    Easily if fixed assets can be obtained by exchanging old assets. If during the exchange process the old asset price is lower than the new asset, then the old asset exchange will be added to cash.

    As for the recording process, it is seen based on the economic value of an old asset added to the amount of cash paid to get the latest fixed asset .

    • Obtained From Grants

    Fixed assets can be obtained with a grant system. The latest fixed asset is indeed provided free of charge by the owner. However, the fixed assets obtained will still be recorded according to the market price of these assets. This recording is done solely to make it easier if one day there is a depreciation in the value of assets or fixed assets .

    • Create Personally Fixed Assets

    Finally, you can get fixed assets by making them yourself. If a company is confident and able to make a fixed asset , then that can also be considered legitimate. However, the applicable recording process will be adjusted to the amount of costs incurred by a company to obtain these fixed assets .

    How to Record Fixed Asset Reports

    A company that has fixed assets must make a report. As previously explained, fixed asset reporting can also help a company get investors.

    The process of recording reports can also be done in several ways. Starting from the manual by recording it in certain software or you can also use a special application to record fixed asset reports owned by a company.

    The several steps required in recording fixed asset reporting are as follows.

    • Check All Financial Records Including Fixed Assets From the Previous Year

    The first thing you can do is look at the data or records for the past year regarding the fixed assets owned by a company. At least a company has fixed assets that have been recorded in one year.

    Therefore, fixed assets have a possible depreciation value, so you must also have an exact number of fixed asset depreciation values .

    • Note If There Is a Latest Fixed Asset

    You must record every new fixed asset within one year in the report. To make it easier to record the initial value of these fixed assets , you can also find out through proof of payment or through receipts. Apart from that, you also have to record what benefits are provided by the fixed assets as well as the residual value.

    • Record the List of Fixed Assets That Have Been Released

    If a fixed asset is released, the data on the disposal of the fixed asset must be recorded. Starting from the value of depreciation, profits or losses that are seen based on the book of goods that have been sold.

    The explanation above is all related to fixed assets. Starting from the understanding, benefits, types and all matters related to fixed assets already in the explanation above. Of course, this information will help you a little to gain additional knowledge about fixed assets.

    Book Recommendations & Related Articles

    Author: Hendrik Nuryanto

    Also Read!

    1. How to Calculate Production Costs?
    2. Understanding What is Retail Business and How it Works
    3. Consumer Behavior Theory and Its Application in the Business World
    4. Get to know Business Management and Its Components
    5. What is Production Theory?
    6. Examples of Production, Consumer, and Distribution Activities
    7. Definition of Acquisition in the Business World and Its Benefits